Pontiac 2003 Grand Am Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-24

: Pontiac Pontiac-2003-Pontiac-Grand-Am-Owners-Manual-818885 pontiac-2003-pontiac-grand-am-owners-manual-818885 pontiac pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 354

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

cooz

The 2003 Pontiac Grand Am Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ...........................
Front
Seats
...............................................
Rear
Seats
...............................................
Safety
Belts
..............................................
Child
Restraints
.......................................
SupplementalRestraint
System (SRS)
......................................
Restraint
System
Check
............................
Features and Controls .....................................
Keys ........................................................
2-2
Doors
and
Locks
.......................................
Windows .................................................
Theft-DeterrentSystems
............................
Starting and OperatingYour Vehicle
...........
Mirrors ....................................................
Stcr3.g~.A rean
...................
..........
~

1-1
1-2
1-8
1-9
1-32
1-53
1-60
2-1
2-7
2-1 5
2-1 7
2-18
2-35
2-37

Sunroof
.................................................. 2-38
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
InstrumentPanelOverview
.......................... 3-2
ClimateControls
......................................
3-18
\Warning Lights, Gages a.nd Indicators
......... 3-22
Audio System@) ....................................... 3-38

Driving YourVehicle .......................................
4-1
YourDriving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
...................................................
4-32
Service and Appearance Care ..........................
5-1
Service .....................................................
5-3
Fuel .........................................................
5-5
Checking Things Under
the Hood
............................................. 5-10
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-49
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-52
Tires
......................................................
Appearance Care
.....................................
Vehicle Identification
.................................
Electrical System ......................................
Capacities and Specifications
.....................
Normai iviainienance Fiepiawl I 1t.1-1; F&iJiS ......

5-53
5-72

5-80
5-81
5-86
5-00
nn

Maintenance Schedule .....................................
bhintenance Schedule ................................
Customer Assistance Information ....................
Customer AssistanceInformation
..................

6-1
6-2
7-1
7-2
Index ............................................................... ..I

Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
PONTIAC

1
1

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,
the PONTIAC Emblem and the name GRAND AM
are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited’’ for Pontiac Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.

Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 22691531 A First Edition
II

Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain things.

Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.

‘Copyright

General Motors Corporation 06/03/02
All Rights Reserved

Safety Warnings and Symbols

with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this’’ or “Don’t let
this happen.”

You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.

You
. - -. will also find a circle

These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.

...

111

Vehicle Damage Warnings

Vehicle Symbols

Also, in this book you will find these notices:

Your vehicle may be equipped with components and
labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols, used
on your vehicle, are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage or indicator.

Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the following
topics in the Index:
0

When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

“Engine Compartment Overview”

* “Instrument Panei Overview”
0

“Climate Controls’’
“Audio Systems”

Also see Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators on
page 3-22.

These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:

CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY

LATCH BOTH LAP AND
SHOULDER BELTS TO
PROTECT OCCUPANT
DONOT TWIST SAFETY
BELT WHEN ATTACHING

PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING

FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS

CAUSTIC
BATTERY
4CID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS

MOVE SEAT
FULLY
REARWARD+
SECURE
CHILD SEAT
PULL BELT

AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY

LIGHTING

COMPLETELY
1-HEN SECURE
CHILD SEAT

-I

\!&
/
z

DO NOT INSTALL
A REAR-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION

PARKING
LAMPS

WINDOW

ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP

BAlTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM

COOLANT
DO NOT INSTALL A
FORWARD-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK

ACCESS

ENGINE
COOLANT
FAN

1-1

FUEL

ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE W

'lb'

?"!"!E?

FOG
LAMPS

ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES

OWNER'S
MANUAL

SERVICE

fm)
\u/

SERVICE

iviAi\iuWi

Section 1

Seats and Restraint Sy

Front Seats ...................................................... 1.2
Manual Seats ................................................ 1.2
Six-Way Power Driver Seat .............................. 1-3
,-.
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1-;j
Head Restraints ............................................. 1.5
Seatback Latches ........................................... 1-5
Easy Entry Seat ............................................. 1-6
Power Lift Seat .............................................. 1-7
Rear Seats ....................................................... 1-8
Rear Seat Operation ....................................... 1.8
Safety Belts ..................................................... 1.9
Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone ................. 1-9
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14
Driver Position .............................................. 1-14
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-22
Right Front Passenger Position ....................... 1-23
Rear Seat Passengers .................................. 1.23
p-Dnemnnnnr Dneitinn
UGI
V V I . ~ V ....................... 1-27
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ....................................... 1-29
Safety Belt Extender ..................................... 1-31
Child Restraints ............................................. 1.32
Older Children .............................................. 1-32
Infants and Young Children ............................ 1-34
Child Restraint Systems ................................. 1-38
+-v

11G1

0 n - v
I IbUI

U ~ ~ ~ O I L J U I

Where to Put the Restraint .............................
Top Strap ....................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System .........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ............................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position ............................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................

1-41
1-42
1.43
1-44

1-46
1-46
1-48

1-50

Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) ............................................. 1-53
Where Are the Air Bags? ............................... 1-55
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-56
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ..................... 1-57
n u w Lues 5i-l Ail- Ea9 ECS~E~G?
..................... 157’
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...1-58
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-59
Restraint System Check .................................. 1-60
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-60
Repiacing Resirzlint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................ 1-61
1-1

Front Seats
Manual Seats

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.

1-2

Six-Way Power Driver Seat

Reclining Seatbacks

If your vehicle has this
feature, the power seat
control is located on
the outboard side of the
driver's seat.

This control allows you to move the seat up, down,
forward, or backward. It will also move the front or rear
of the seat cushion up or down.
Move the seat forward or rearward by pushing the
control toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
Raise or lower the entire seat cushion by holding
the control up or down.

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat and move the seatback
to where you want it. Release the lever to lock the
seatback. Pull up on the lever without pushing on the
seaiback ana iile seaiuack wiii y u iu 2i-l Uprighi ~ G S ~

~ G K .

Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by
holding the front of the control up or down.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by
holding the rear of the control up or down.

1-3

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety beltscan’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do it’s job either. Ina crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.

1-4

For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in theseat and wear your safety belt
properly.

Head Restraints

Seatback Latches
For two-door model vehicles, the front seatbacks fold
forward to let people get into the back seat. The
seatback latch is designed for one-handed operation.
To fold a front seatback forward, lift the seatback
latch fully without pushing forward on the seatback to
unlock it. Then the seatback will fold forward.
Push the seatback to its original position, and the
seatback will lock.

forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of
+L- r - - + r - : n +

m l n r . n m t tn

+hn tnn n
f
VI
IW

L I I C I G 3 L I U t I I l l a blkJaba&b u L I

rwp

\ / n ~ t rhnad
I IVCIU.

vu-

Thic
a
I ~

position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

1-5

Easy Entry Seat
For two-door model vehicles, the right front seat of your
vehicle makes it easy for people to get in and out of
the rear seat.
1. Fold the right front seatback forward by lifting the
seatback latch fully.
2. The seat will slide forward to allow someone to get
into the rear seat area.

3. Push the seatback upright to lock it and slide the
seat fully rearward to lock it.

4. Adjust the seat to the desired position.
5. The front passenger should try to move the seat to
make sure the seat is locked into place.

I -6

4b CAUTION:
If the easy entry right front seat isn't locked, it
can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the
person sitting there could be injured. After
you've used it, be sure to push rearward on an
easy entry seat to be sure it is locked.

Bower Lift Seat

If your vehicle has this feature, to move the power lift
seat forward or rearward, pull up on the lever located
under the front of the driver’s seat to unlock it. Slide the
seat to where you want it and release the lever. Try
.- +L.
..,:&h
h,-.A,, +- --Iln
+hn c.--t
L W I I I W V C LI 12acat V V I U
y u u ~u u u y
I I I U I \ ~
uwut

L-

---&

To raise or lower the power lift seat, hold the switch
located on the outboard side of the driver’s seat
up or down.

.,e,lr

U
II I U

is locked into place.

1-7

Rear Seats

2. Fold the seatback down from the inside of the
vehicle.

Rear Seat Operation

To raise the seatback, push the seatback up to return it
to its original position.

Folding the Seatback

Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is latched
securely in the fully upright position.

If your vehicle has this feature, do the following:
1 . Pull the release straps
located in the trunk.
The right strap operates
the passenger’s side
rear split seat. The left
strap operates the
driver’s side rear
split seat.

1-8

Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.

A CA UTl0,N:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected fromit.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
ana cneck tnai your passengers’ Leiis art:
fastened properly too.

1-9

1-10

Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-25.

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as
fast as it goes.

ZC-C

Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts

Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident id I’m wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
Y n ~ r p t more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.

A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
k-l+c.
inctnrrd n f thorn C \ , n n Yr sir b2,-1
3
a a l c r y UGIW V, , U B I , .
--$-+ST

mn+
I IWL 11 I Q L ~ W U

LIVi

system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not oniy in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.

1-13

Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an

accident - even one that isn’t your fault - you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.

First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.

Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shsulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32
or lnfants and Young Children on page 1-34. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.

1-14

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see Manual Seats on page 1-2 or Six-Way
Power Driver Seat on page 1-3.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 1-31.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-15

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-16

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
(Four-Door Models)

Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.

To move it down, squeeze the release button and move
the height adjuster to the desired position. You can
move the adjuster up just by pushing on the shoulder
belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where
you want it, try to move it down without squeezing the
release button to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.

1-17

Q: What’s wrong

with this?

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt

is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.

1-18

Q: What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-19

Q: What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren't as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-20

Q: What’s wrong with

this?

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-21

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don't wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-22

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt - except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.

Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

1-23

Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

1-24

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,
tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can
buckle it.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

Puii up on lne iaicn piaie io make sure ii is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-31. Make sure the release
button on the buckle is positioned so you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you
ever had io.

1-25

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-26

Center Rear Passenger Position

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-27

Lap Belt

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.

When you sit in the center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the
belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-31.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.

1-28

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have this feature already. If it doesn’t,
you can get it from any GM dealer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each outside passenger
position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt
comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints
and booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort
guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s
how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.

1-29

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.

1-30

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback
and the interior body, leaving only the loop of the
elastic cord exposed.

Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-23.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shw!dw

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.

1-31

Child Restraints
Older Children

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-32

Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child isso small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in
the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in the center seat position,
the one that has only a lap belt.

1-33

Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt
in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-34

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle's
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle.A baby doesn't weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold
it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (1 10 kg) force on a person's
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.

1-35

Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used

1-36

in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.

Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest partof an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.

is quite
The body structure of a young ch
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that’s
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.

1-37

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.

1-38

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child's body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
sui-,-,E:
bclclster se6is klzv.e ;;.",e-pG;rlt p,zrrless~
;-,iy;-,-lcacl\:

A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.

1-39

Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two
hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has
shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad
which rests low against the child’s body. A shelf-or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached
to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to
the side.

1-40

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.

Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:

You may secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right frontseat, but before you
do, always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
CAUTION:

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child
is in it.

(Continued)

1-41

Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether”. It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.

1-42

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.

Top Strap Anchor Location
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for
the rear seating positions. You’ll find them behind
the rear seat on the filler panel.

Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.

1-43

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You’ll find
anchors (A) in the rear outside seat positions.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system will have a label applied to the seatback
at each anchor position.
The labels are located
near the base of the two
rear outside seating
positions.

1-44

In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a
rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B),
as shown here.

If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect a child sittingthere. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraintis
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH system” or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position’’ in
the Index for information on how to secure a
child restraint in your vehicle.
With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.

1-45

Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position

1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on
page 1-42. Tighten the top strap according to
the child restraint instructions.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-44.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be
sure to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

1-46

LP- 1

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position

4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt
while you push down on the child restraint. If
you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-4%

You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say. See Top Strap on page 1-42 if the child
restraint has one.

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
3

....

---..

Pllt tho rnctraint nn thn cnat
..I-

I -VI.-..

V .

..a-

3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-49

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.

Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat.
Here’s why:

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-42, if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats on page 1-2.

2. Put the restraint on the seat.

1-50

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicte’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-51

6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

1-52

Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)
This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) or air bag system.
Your vehicle has air bags - one air bag for the driver
and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
- even if
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air
bags are designed to work only in moderate to
severe crashes where the front of your vehicle
hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate
at all in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for
some unrestrained occupants, air bags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful air bags have provided in the
past. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety hp!t prnperly - whether nr not there’s
an air bag for that person.

1-53

Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of aneye. If you’re too close to an
inflating air bag, as you would be ifyou were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with air bags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.

1-54

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them.Young children
and infants need the protection thata child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the parts of this manual called “Older
Children” and “Infants and Young Children”.

AIR
BAG

There is a air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows AIR BAG.

Where Are the Air Bags?

The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-25.

The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the
rtnnrinn t“r“r IhI””,.
nnl
I , ‘y

UL””,

1-55

If something is betweenan occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on ornear any other air
bag covering.

When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.

An air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crashes. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level”.
If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t
move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 14 mph
(14 to 23 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,
with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat
above or below this range.

1-56

if your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts because
inflation would not help the occupant.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact
and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and
near-frontal impacts.

What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?

How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the
protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But air bags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant's motion is
not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.

In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag
and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
:-

$*--+

I I I I I W I I L VI

+he -:ah&$ w e - +
LIIC IIYIIL I I W I I L

----_-.-_c

pacmr;r~y~~.

1-57

What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module - the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
bag - will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but
not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air
bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.

1-58

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation and
driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
air bag module in the steering wheel or both the
air bag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle

Your dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-9.

For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid wires
wrapped with yellow tape or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate white someone is working on your vehicle.

1-59

Restraint System Check

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash

Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)

1-60

A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly aftera crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as thev would be if
worn during a more severe crash, the; you need new
parts.

If your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the
special part of the safety belt that goes through the seat
t o the adjuster may need to be replaced.

If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system park. See Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) on page 1-53.

If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.

1-61

Section 2

Features and Controls

Keys .............................................................. -2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System ......................... 2.3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ..........-2-4
Qoors and Locks ............................................. 2-7
Door Locks .................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks .......................................... 2-8
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-8
Rear Door Security Locks .............................. 2-10
Lockout Protection ........................................ 2-11
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-11
Trunk .......................................................... 2-12
Windows ........................................................ 2-15
Manual Windows .......................................... 2-15
Power Windows ............................................ 2-16
Sun Visors ................................................... 2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems .................................. 2-17
Passlock@ ................................................. 2-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................ 2-18
New Vehicle Break-In .................................... 2-18
Ignition Positions .......................................... 2-18
@

Starting Your Engine ..................................... 2.19
Engine Coolant Heater .................................. 2.22
Automatic Transaxle Operation ....................... 2.24
Manual Transaxle Operation .......................... -2-27
Parking Brake .............................................. 2.29
Shifting Into Park (P) ..................................... 2.30
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................. 2.32
Parking Your VehiclelKey Removal ..................2.32
Parking Over Things That Burn ....................... 2-33
Engine Exhaust ............................................ 2-33
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-34
Mirrors ........................................................... 2-35
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................. 2.35
Outside Remote Control Mirror ....................... 2.35
Outside Power Mirrors ................................... 2.36
Outside Convex Mirror ................................... 2.36
Storage Areas ................................................ 2.37
Glove Box ................................................... 2.37
n . .-L.IA..
\.f
1
3
7
UUpl I U I U G I (3) ................................................
Center Console Storage Area ......................... 2.37
L.UI

Sunroof .........................................................

2-38

2- 1

Keys

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don't leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-2

One key is used for the
ignition and all locks.

Notice: Your vehicle has a number of new features
that can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever
lock your keys inside. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have
spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When a new vehicle is delivered, the key has a
bar-coded key tag. This tag may be removed by your
dealer before it is delivered.
Each tag has a key code on it that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the
tag in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able
to have one made easily using this tag. If you need
bnx! m n tn I I n r l r rlnqlnr fzy t h y
u
~r y e ~ t”kn\r
cndn
i\uy, yu
yvu,
‘J
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5 for more
information.
‘)I

n n \ h t
I I U Y V

L”

U”Ul”l

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
A

TI.!-

^I-..:--

.--A

--..-- :.-*-.A

^_^I^^

--A

I I 113u e v t ~ e
1 1 ~dy
I lut L ~ U ~
11 I ~
G~ ; I I G
GII ILG, a
1 IU

2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

2-3

Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.

Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet
(1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless
entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
e

The following functions are
available with the keyless
entry system:

Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.

If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.

(Lock): All doors will automatically lock when this
button on the transmitter is pressed. The interior
lamps will turn off after all of the doors are closed. If all
of the doors are closed, the parking lamps will flash
twice and the horn will chirp to indicate locking
has occurred.
2-4

(Unlock): The driver's door will unlock
automatically when this button on the transmitter is
pressed. If the button is pressed again within five
seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior
lamps will stay on for 10 seconds or until the ignition is
turned on. The parking lamps will flash twice to
indicate unlocking has occurred.
gf

(Remote Trunk Release): The trunk will unlock
when the vehicle symbol on the transmitter is pressed,
as long as the trunk lockout is not engaged. You
can open the trunk with the transmitter when the vehicle
speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h), when the parking
brake is engaged, or when the ignition is off. The interior
lamps will come on for 10 seconds or until the ignition
switch is turned to ON.

(Horn): The horn will sound and the headlamps
and the parking lamps will flash for up to two minutes
when the horn symbol on the transmitter is pressed. The
interior lamps will come on and remain on while the
horn is sounding and the lamps are flashing. The horn
and lamps can be turned off by pressing the horn
symbol button again or by turning the ignition to ON.

Programmable Horn Chirp
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
lock the doors or use the delayed locking feature
the parking lamps will flash and the horn will chirp.
The programmable horn chirp can be disabled by
pressing and holding either of the door lock switches in
the unlock position for 10 seconds with the ignition
ON and all of the doors closed. When you hear the horn
chirp, programming is complete.
To reactivate the horn chirp feature, repeat the above
procedure.

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
-n\t
inm
u
l l y Ir Un Ir In I- ~i n
l l ' l l l

.,.-

tmncmittnrc with
...,, \In1I wh@n\In[1 nn

y La-,

l YI , , , . .

I--

I--'

J -

your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
2-5

Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
1. Use a flat object like a coin to separate the bottom
half from the top half of the transmitter.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with the new
one. Make sure the positive side of the battery
faces up. Use one three-volt, CR2032, or
equivalent, type battery.

3. Put the two halves back together. Make sure the
cover is on tightly, so water won’t get in.

2-6

Doors and Locks

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or remote keyless
entry system, if your vehicle is equipped with this
feature. If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, you
can only use your key to unlock the driver’s side door

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers - especially children - can
easily open the doors and fall outof a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out.A child
can be overcome by extremeheat and can
SIJffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
heip prevent this from happening.

2-7

Power Door Locks
With the power door locks, you can lock or unlock all of
the doors on your vehicle using the driver’s or front
passenger’s door lock switch.
Press the bottom of the switch to lock all of the doors.
Press the top of the switch to unlock all of the doors.

Delayed Locking
This feature will allow the driver to delay the actual
locking of the vehicle. This feature will not operate if the
key is left in the ignition. See Lockout Protection on
page 2- I 1.
When LOCK on the driver’s power door lock switch is
pressed, with the key removed from the ignition and the
driver’s door open, three chimes will be heard. The
doors will not lock. Seven seconds after the driver’s door
has been closed, all of the doors will lock and the
parking lamps will flash. The horn will also chirp if the
horn chirp feature is enabled. See “Programmable Horn
Chirp” previously for more information.
If the driver opens another door before the seven
seconds, the doors will not lock until seven seconds
after the last door is closed.

2-8

If the power door lock switch is pressed to LOCK twice
when leaving the vehicle, or the LOCK button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the
doors will lock immediately.
If the power door lock switch is pressed to unlock, the
doors will not lock automatically.

Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Just close the doors and turn on the ignition. All of the
doors will lock when you move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) to REVERSE (R) on vehicles with an
automatic transaxle. All of the doors will lock when the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h) on
vehicles with a manual transaxle.
If someone needs to get out while the vehicle is
running, have that person use the door lock. When the
door is closed again, it will lock automatically when
the vehicle reaches about 5 mph (8 km/h).
All doors will automatically unlock when the shift lever is
moved to PARK (P) on vehicles with an automatic
transaxle or to REVERSE (R) on vehicles with a manual
transaxle and the key is turned to OFF.

Customizing the Automatic Door Locks
One of four operating modes may be selected and
programmed by the driver on vehicles with an automatic
transaxle:
e

Mode 1: All doors automatically lock when the
transaxle is shifted out of PARK (P). The doors will
remain locked unless manually unlocked or the
lock button is pressed. All doors will unlock when
the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P) and the key is
turned to OFF.
Mode 2: This mode is only available on vehicle’s
equipped with a remote keyless entry transmitter.
All doors automatically lock when the transaxle
is shifted out of PARK (P). Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P)
and the key is turned to OFF.
Mode 3: All doors automatically lock when the
transaxle is shifted out of PARK (P). No automatic
door unlock.
\dl& 4: !V\lrr g.~!t~mstic.
dinr in& or I-rnlnck

One of the four operating modes may be selected and
programmed by the driver on vehicles with a manual
transaxle:
Mode 1: All doors automatically lock when the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The doors will remain locked unless manually
unlocked or the lock button is pressed. All doors will
unlock when the transaxle is shifted into
REVERSE (R) and the key is turned to OFF.
e

Mode 2: This mode is only available on vehicle’s
equipped with a remote keyless entry transmitter.
All doors automatically lock when the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). Only the driver’s
door will unlock when the transaxle is shifted
into REVERSE (R) and the key is turned to OFF.
Mode 3: All doors automatically lock when
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h
No automatic door unlock.
Mode 4: No automatic door lock or unlock.

2-9

Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was
programmed in Mode 1. To determine the current
mode or to change to a different mode, do the following:
1. Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a
manual transaxle in REVERSE (R) with the parking
brake engaged and turn the ignition to ON.

Rear Door Security Locks
If your vehicle is a four-door model, it has rear door
security locks that help prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the inside.
The switch is located on
the inside of the rear door.

2. Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock
switch for 10 seconds. Release the switch when
you hear the chime.

3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is in.
You can change the mode by pressing and
holding LOCK on the power door lock switch (two
chimes for Mode 2, three chimes for Mode 3
and four chimes for Mode 4).

4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes
that matches the mode you want.
The mode you selected is now set.
To use the security locks, do the following:
1. Move the switch up.
2. Close the door.

3. Do the same thing to the other rear door.

2-10

The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open a rear door when the security lock is on, do
the following:
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2, Then open the door from the outside.

If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to open
the rear door from the inside. You should let adults
and older children know how these security locks work,
and how to cancel the locks.
To cancel a rear door lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open it from
the outside.
2. Move the switch down.
3. Do the same to the other rear door.

Lockout Protection
Lockout protection is a standard feature intended to
provide enhanced security and convenience. This
feature prevents a driver who has left the keys in the
ignition from locking the doors or using the power door
locks while any door is open.
To override this feature, when the key is in the ignition
and a door is open, hold the power door lock switch
for three seconds.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of your vehicle. If you don’t leave the keys in
the ignition, or if you use the manual door lock, or if
you use the remote keyless entry transmitter (if
equipped), you could still lock your keys inside your
vehicle. Always remember to take your keys with you.

Leaving Your Vehicle

The rear doors will now work normally.
If you are leaving your vehicle, open your door and
set the locks from the inside, then get out and close
&I.

- - ..

11 le UUUl.

2-1 1

Trunk
To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the key and
turn the trunk lock cylinder or use the remote keyless
entry transmitter, if your vehicle has this feature.

When closing the trunk, close from the center to ensure
it fully latches.

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’tsee or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the trunk lid open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through theseal
between the body and the trunk lid:
Make sure all other windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Climate Controls”
in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.

See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

2-12

Remote Trunk Release

Remote Trunk Release Lockout
Your remote trunk release has a lockout feature. The
switch is located on the inside of the trunk lid, mounted
on the trunk lid latch.

Press the remote trunk release button, located on the
driver’s door, to release the trunk lid.
Make sure the remote trunk release lockout feature is
not activated. Also, the remote trunk release will
only work when either the ignition is off, the parking
brake is engaged or the vehicle speed is less than
2 mph (3 km/h).

T5 k!T the !ccknnt nn, S ! k k ?he s?nli?nhe!! the way tn
the left (ON). To turn the lockout off, slide the switch all
the way to the right (OFF).
When the lockout is on, the remote trunk release switch
on the instrument panel will not release the trunk lid.
Hcwever, the trunk lid can stil! he opened with the keyj
but not with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
2-13

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Trap-Resistant Trunk Kit
To help prevent a child from becoming trapped in your
trunk, you can order a trap-resistant trunk kit from
your dealer. This kit includes:
a modified trunk latch,
a lighted release handle, and
seatback tethers (for vehicles with folding rear
seatbacks).
See your dealer for additional information.

Notice: The emergency trunk release handle is not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk lid or
as an anchor point when securing items in the trunk.
Improper use of the emergency trunk release
handle could damage it.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle up to open the trunk from the inside.

2-14

Windows

Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
I

Manual Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.

2-15

Power Windows

To stop the window while it is lowering, push the switch
forward. To raise the window, push and hold the
switch forward.

Window Lock Out
On four-door models, the driver’s power window
controls also include a window lock out. When the
lock-out switch is moved to the left (with the red
showing), the driver and passengers will be able to use
their window switches. Move the lock-out switch to
the right to stop the passengers from using their window
switches. The driver can still control all the windows
with the lock on.

Sun Visors
If your vehicle is equipped with power windows, the
window switches are located on the armrest on
the driver’s door. In addition, each passenger door has
a window switch.

Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature. Pull the top of the switch partway, and
the driver’s window will open a small amount. If the
switch is pulled all the way, the window will go all
the way down.
2-16

To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also swing them to the side.

Visor Vanity Mirror
Swing down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose
the vanity mirror.

Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.

Your vehicle has the Passlock@theft-deterrent system.
Passlock@is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock@ enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder has
not been tampered with.

During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go off
approximately five seconds after the ignition key is
turned to ON and the engine is started.
After attempting to start the engine, if the SECURITY
light flashes or stays on, wait ten minutes with the key in
ON until the light goes off. Then turn the ignition to
OFF before attempting to start the engine again.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5 for
more information.

2-17

Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In

Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to four
different positions.

Notice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:

Don’t drive at any one speed - fast or
slow - for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towing
a Trailer” in the Index for more information.

2-18

A (OFF): This is the only position from which you can
remove the key. With an automatic transaxle, the
shift lever must be in PARK (P) with the ignition in OFF
to remove the key. With a manual transaxle, the shift
lever must be in REVERSE (R) with the ignition in OFF
to remove the key.

A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s door
when the ignition is off and the key is in the ignition.

Notice: If your key seems stuck in OFF and
you can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key; if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only
with your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.

B (ACCESSORY): This position unlocks the transaxle.
It also lets you use things like the radio and windshield
wipers when the engine is not running. To use
ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise to the first
position. Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed
or towed, but never try to push-start your vehicle.
C (ON): This position is where the key returns to after
you start your engine and release the key. The
ignition switch stays in ON when the engine is running.
But even when the engine is not running, you can
use ON to operate your electrical accessories and to
display some instrument panel warning lights.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow the radio to
continue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition is
turned to OFF.
Your radio will work when the ignition key is in ON or
ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from ON to OFF,
the radio will continue to work up to 10 minutes or
until the driver’s door is opened.

Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxie. shift to PARK (Pj oniy when your
vehicle is stopped.

D (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON for normal driving.

2-19

Manual Transaxle
The gear selector should be in neutral and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down - that’s a safety feature.

Starting Your 2.2L L4 ECOTECTM
Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition
key to START. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.

2-20

When your engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Don’t
“race” your engine when it’s cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or OOC), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the wayto the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in

START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing,
but this time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine
might not perform properly.

Starting Your 3400 V6 Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine warms up.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about 15
seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.

2. If the engine doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way
down while you turn the key to START. Do this until
the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of
the key.

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
still won’t start or starts briefly but then stops again,
repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on temperature.
When the engine starts, release the key and the
accelerator pedal.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine
might not perform properly.

2-2 1

Engine Coolant Heater

3400 V6 Engine
2.2L L4 ECOTEC Engine

2-22

In very cold weather, 0°F (-18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater, if your vehicle has this feature, can
help. You'll get easier starting and better fuel economy
during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater
should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to
starting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (OOC),
use of the coolant heater is not required.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. On
the 2.2L L4 ECOTECTMengine, the engine coolant
heater cord is located in front of the coolant
surge tank on the passenger’s side of the engine
compartment. On the 3400 V6 engine, the
engine coolant heater cord is located near the
engine air cleaner/filter. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on
location.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1IO-volt AC outlet.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriouslv
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 1 IO-volt AC outlet. If the cord
won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

2-23

Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle
has a shift lever located on
the console between the
seats.

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you haveto. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in the
Index. If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a
Traileryyin the Index.

I
2

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.

2-24

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. You have to apply your regular
brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
application. Then move the shift lever into the gear
you wish. Press the shift lever button before moving the
shift lever. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-32
later in this section.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal,
your vehicle could move very rapidly. You
could lose control and hit people or objects.
Don’t shift into a drive gear while your engine
is racing.

to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
~~

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-3 1.

Notice: Damage to your transaxle caused by
shifting into a drive gear with the engine racing isn’t
covered by your warranty.

2-25

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and
you’re:
Going less than 35 mph (55km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.

You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go
faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle
system sensor. If you drive very far thatway, your
vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens,
have your vehicle serviced rightaway. Until then,
you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less
than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds.

2-26

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some
times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
0

When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
When going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
Notice: Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph
(90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. Use
THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as
much as possible. Don’t shift into SECOND (2)
unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h)
or you can damage yourengine.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (I), the transaxle won’t shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: If your front wheels won’t turn, don’t
try to drive. This might happen id you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transaxle. Also,
if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your
vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This
could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your
brakes to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.

Manual Transaxle Operation

This is your shift pattern.
The clutch must be fully
pressed in when shifting a
manual transaxle to
ensure the transaxle is
L. . I I .

lully Ill

-^^“

ycal.

Here’s how to operate your transaxle:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
that 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST ( I ) , put the
shift lever into NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3),FOURTH (4), and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as YOU press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the
vehicle
stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.

2-27

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal and lift up on the ring on the shift lever to shift into
REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly
while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shift into REVERSE (R) only after your
vehicle is stopped. Shifting into REVERSE (R) while
your vehicle is moving could damage your
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty.

Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
Once the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), the ignition can
be turned to OFF and the key removed.

S ft Speec'

If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Don't shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.

Up-Shift Light
If you have a manual
transaxle, you may have a
SHIFT light located on
the instrument panel
cluster. This light will show
you when to shift to the
next higher gear for
the best fuel economy.

When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if the weather, road and traffic conditions
permit. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when the light comes on.

2-28

Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, pull up on the parking brake
handle. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on. Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-26.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake handle up until you can
press the release button. Hold the release button in as
you move the brake handle all the way down.

Nofice: Driving with the parking brake on can
cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have
to replace them, and you could also damage
other parts of your vehicle.
Automatic Transaxle shown, Manual
Transaxle similar

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-37.

2-29

Shifting Into Park (P)

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t
move, even when you’re on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, do the
following to shift into PARK (P):

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.

Hold in the button on the shift lever.
Push the shift lever all the way toward the front
of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-30

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transaxle Only)

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Don’t leave
your vehicle with the engine running.

Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
automatic transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight
of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking
pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into Park
(P)” previously in the section.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

If you have to leave your automatic transaxle vehicle
with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in
PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before
~ Q L Ip31.1p
!
it. .After y~iI’\.~p
m ~ \ / p rthe
j shift Iwgr intn
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see
if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pushing the button.

If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully
!nrked into P.4p.K (PI.

2-31

Shifting Out of Park (P)
If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle it has an
automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have
to apply your regular brake before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition is in ON. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 2-24.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you wish. Press
the shift lever button before moving the shift lever.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY.
2. Apply and hold the regular brake until the end of
Step 5.

2-32

3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to START, to start the vehicle.

5. Shift to the drive gear you want.
6. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Your Vehicle/Key Removal
Before leaving your manual transaxle model vehicle,
fully press the clutch pedal in, move the shift lever into
REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking brake.
Once the shift lever has been placed in REVERSE (R)
with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the
ignition key to OFF, remove the key and release the
clutch. See Manual Transaxle Operation on page 2-27.

Parking Over Things That Burn

Engine Exhaust

R
Er.,.ne exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
0 Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
0 Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
0 Repairs weren’t done correctly.
* Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.

I
I

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
ever papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
thatcanburn.
I

2-33

Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.

Idling the engine withthe climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan is at the highest setting. One place this
can happen is agarage. Exhaust - with
CO - can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
“Winter Driving” in the Index.

2-34

It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you’veleft the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shiftlever to
PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a trailer,
also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-37.

Mirrors

Outside Remote Control Mirror

Manual Rearview Mirror

The outside rearview mirror should be adjusted so you
can see a little of the side of your vehicle when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.

The mirror can be adjusted two ways. First, to adjust
the height of the mirror, adjust the arm that connects the
mirror to the windshield. Second, adjust the angle of
the mirror, by moving the mirror to a position that allows
you to see out of the back window.

Adjust the driver’s outside mirror with the control lever
on the driver’s door.

To adjust your passenger’s mirror, sit in the driver’s seat
and have a passenger adjust the mirror for you.

To reduce glare from headlamps behind you, move the
lever toward you to the night position. To return the
mirror to the daytime position, move the lever away
from you.

2-35

Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle has this
feature, this selector knob
controls both outside
rearview mirrors.

Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
dri. 9 s seat.

A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Select the mirror you want to adjust by turning the knob
to the left or right. Adjust each mirror so that you can
see the side of your vehicle and the area beside
and behind your vehicle when you are sitting in a
comfortable driving position.
Turn the knob to the center to turn the remote control
mirror off.

2-36

Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area

Glove Box

The center console has two separate storage areas.
The upper compartment, which is also the armrest, can
be used to store maps, gloves, etc. To open, pull up
on the front of the lid.

To open, pull the glove box latch toward you.

Cupholder(s)
Pull down the door on the rear of the center console to
use the rear seat cupholders.

2-37

Sunroof
If your vehicle has this feature, the switch is located on
the headliner between the sun visors. The sunroof
will only operate when the ignition is in ON.
The sunroof can be opened to a vent position or it can
be express-opened all of the way.
To open the sunroof to the vent position, you must first
open the sunshade by hand. Then push the switch
back and release it.
To fully open the sunroof, push the switch back again
and release it.
In both the vent and fully open positions, the air flow
can be adjusted for driving comfort by pushing and
holding the switch forward until the sunroof moves to
the desired position.

2-38

To close the sunroof, push the switch forward and hold
it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released during operation. Remember to
close the sunshade by hand.

The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
your vehicle has an electrical failure.

Notice: Do not attempt to force the sunshade
forward of the sliding glass panel. Damage will
occur and the sunroof may not open or close
properly.

Section 3

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview ............................... 3.2
HazardWarnin Flashers ................................ 3.4
Other Warning !bevices ................................... 3.5
Horn ............................................................. 3.5
Tilt Wheel ..................................................... 3.5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ......................... 3.6
Exterior Lamps ............................................. 3.13
Interior Lamps .............................................. 3.16
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................ 3.17
Climate Controls ............................................ 3.18
Climate Control System ................................. 3.18
Outlet Adjustment ......................................... 3.21
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-22
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................ 3.23
Speedometer and Odometer ........................... 3.24
Tachometer ................................................. 3.24
Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................. 3.25
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................ 3.25
Charging System Light .................................. 3.26
Up-Shift Light ............................................... 3.26
Erake Q
- J l -.-.
Q t T ! !n!=lrning Light ........................
3-76
Anti-Lock Brake System
WarninLight
........................................... 3-28
Enhancec? Traction System
Warning Light ........................................... 3.28
Enhanced Traction System
Active Light .............................................. 3.29
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage .................. 3 .o3n ~
Low Coolant Warning Light ............................ 3.30
~

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................
Oil Pressure Light .........................................
Low Oil Level Li ht .......................................
Change Engine ail Light ................................
Securit Light: ...............................................
Low d s h e r Fluid Warning Light .....................
Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................
Fuel Gage ...................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems RDS) ..................................
Setting the Time or Radios with Radio

3.31
3.34
3.35
3-35
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-37
3-38
3-38
3-39
3-39
3-43
3-55

...........................
..............................
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(Non-RDS Radios) .....................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS Radios) ...........................................

3-68

.......................

Q
xa
v vv

A .A
MUUIW

C ' & - A ~ ; \~
A l~h

U L C C I II

nnl

V V I IGGI

Pnmtrnlrr
V

1 ILI WIG

3-68

Understanding Radio Reception ...................... 3-70
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................. 3-70
Care of Your CDs ......................................... 3-71
Care of Your CD Player ................................ 3-72
Fixed Mast Antenna ...................................... 3-72
XM Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-72
System
DAB
Antenna
Radio
........................... 3n- 1 1
Chime Level Adjustment ................................ 3-72
Tn

3- 1

Instrument Panel Overview

3-2

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A.FogLamp Button
B. Instrument Panel Brightness Thumbwheel
C. TurnSignaVMultifunction Lever
D. Horn
E.Instrument Panel Cluster
F. Windshield WiperNVasher Lever
G. Ignition Switch
H. Enhanced Traction System Button
I. Hazard Warning Flashers Button
J. Instrument Panel Fuse Blocks

K. Hood ReleaseHandle
L. Tilt Wheel Lever

M. Audio System Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
N. Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped)

0. Shift Lever
P. Cigarette Lighter
Q. Climate Control System

R.AudioSystem

3-3

Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning flasher is located near the center of
the instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

3-4

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.

Other Warning Devices

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.

If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (I00 m) behind your
vehicle.

Horn
You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbol on
your steering wheel.

Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit and enter
your vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever
toward you. Then move the wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

3-5

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
0

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals
Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

Flash-to-Pass
ExteriorLampsControl

For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3- 13.

Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.

3-6

An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.

Headlamps On Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and turn off the ignition
while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a warning
chime.

Weadlamp High/low-Beam Changer
~~

~~~

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-81.

To change the headlamps from low beam to
high beam, push the turn signaVmultifunction lever
away from you.
When the high beams are
on, a light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on if the
ignition is in ON.

To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.

3-7

Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signaVmultifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.

Windshield Wipers

For a single wiper cycle, push the lever down to MIST,
then release it. For more cycles, hold the lever down
longer.
For steady wiping at low speed, move the lever up to
the LO position. For high-speed wiping, move the lever
up further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move the lever
to OFF.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or snow.
Move the lever to INT (Intermittent), then turn the inner
band, labeled INT ADJ (Intermittent Adjustment),
and choose the delay you want. Turn the inner band up
for shorter delay times between wiper cycles. Turn
the band down for a longer delay time between wiper
cycles.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades
do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

You control the windshield wipers by moving the lever
with the wiper symbol on it up or down.

3-8

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Windshield Washer

Cruise Control

To wash your windshield, press the button at the end of
the stalk until the washers begin.

In freezing weather, don't use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When you release the button, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for about three times
or will resume the speed you were using before.
If your vehicle has this feature, the cruise control
buttons are located on the bottom of the steering wheel.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40km/h) or more without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h).

3-9

The cruise control will turn off if any of the following
occur:
The brakes are applied,
the clutch pedal is applied (manual transaxle),
the automatic transaxle is shifted to NEUTRAL (N),
the parking brake is applied, or
e

the brake system warning light is on.

Cruise control can be dangerous where
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Don’t use cruise control on
slippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the enhanced
traction control system, if your vehicle has this feature,
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. See Enhanced Traction
System ( € E ) on page 4-9. When road conditions allow
you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise
control back on.

Setting Cruise Control

If you leave your cruise control on when yc re
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you don’t want to.You could
be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
1, Press cruise ON OFF. An indicator light will come
on when ON OFF is pressed.
2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET COAST button and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-10

Resuming a Set Speed

Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset
it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can press the cruise control RESUME ACCEL
(Resume/Accelerate) button briefly.

Press the RESUME ACCEL button. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed you want, and then
release the button. To increase your speed in very
small amounts, press the RESUME ACCEL
button briefly and then release it. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
faster.

You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.

The accelerate feature will only work after you turn on
the cruise control by pressing the SET COAST button.

If you press the RESUME ACCEL button longer, the
vehicle will keep going faster until you release the button
or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
don’t hold down the RESUME ACCEL button.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
9

Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the SET COAST button, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.

Press the SET COAST button until you reach the
lower speed you want, then release it.
e

To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET COAST button briefly. Each time you do
this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

3-11

Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.

3-12

Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Press the cruise control RESUME ACCEL button
and the SET COAST buttons at the same time.
Press cruise ON OFF.
Push the clutch pedal if you have a manual
transaxle.

Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

pf (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps, together with the
following.
0

Sidemarker Lamps

Taillamps

License Plate Lamps

Instrument Panel Lights

ED (Headlamps):

Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.

The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.

-g(Exterior Lamps): Turn the outside part of the
lever with the symboi on it, to operate tne iamps.
The exterior lamp control has three positions:

AUTO: Turning the control to this position turns the
headlamps, taillamps and parking lamps on and
off automatically, while the ignition is on, by sensing
how dark it is outside. For more information see
“Automatic Headlamp System” later in this section.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
n q ~ t i m eR~Inningl _ ~ ~ y .(DRL)
np
r,a.n make it ewier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
firnt
a d d in Canada.
11131

3-13

The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:
The ignition is on.
the exterior lamps control is in AUTO or the parking
lamps only position.
the light sensor detects daytime light,
the parking brake is released, and
0

the shift lever is not in PARK (P) on vehicles with
an automatic transaxle only.

When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps and instrument panel lights
will not be illuminated unless you have turned the
exterior lamps control to the parking lamp position.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.

Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.

3-14

Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top
of the instrument panel under the defroster grill, so
be sure it is not covered which will cause the
automatic headlamp system to be on whenever the
ignition is on.
The automatic headlamp system may also be on when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or
bright overhead street lights does not affect the system.
The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only
be affected when the light sensor sees a change
in lighting lasting longer than this delay.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is off.
Then start the vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamps when you need them.

Headlamps Off in Park (P)
To turn the headlamps off when it is dark outside, turn
the exterior lamps control to the parking lamp position.
In this position, the parking lamps, sidemarker lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps and instrument panel
lights will be on, but the headlamps will be off.

To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamps control to
the AUTO or headlamp position.

Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has this
feature, the button for your
fog lamps is located on
the instrument panel, to the
left of the steering wheel,
beside the instrument
panel brightness
thumbwheel.

Delayed Headlamps
The delayed headlamps feature will continue to
illuminate the headlamps for 20 seconds after the key is
turned to OFF, then the headlamps will automatically
turn off.
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature
while it is active turn the turn signaVmultifunction
lever up one position and then back to AUTO.

When using the fog lamps, the ignition must be on as
well as the parking lamps or the low-beam headlamps.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. An indicator
light on the button will glow when the fog lamps are on.
Press the button again to turn the fog lamps off. The
fog lamps will turn off whenever the high-beam
headlamps are turned on. When the high beams are
turned off, the fog lamps will come on again.

3-15

Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.

Entry/Exit Lighting
When you lift the driver’s door handle or open any door,
the lamps inside your vehicle will go on. These lamps
will fade out after about 10 seconds after all of the doors
have been closed or when the ignition is turned to
ON. These lamps will also go on when you press the
trunk release, unlock symbol button or the horn symbol
on the keyless entry system transmitter (if equipped).
The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about
10 seconds after your key is removed from the ignition
to provide an illuminated exit.

Dome Lamp
If your vehicle has this feature, the switch on this lamp
has three positions. The ON position will turn on the
light. The DOOR position will turn on the light whenever
a door is opened or when the instrument panel
brightness thumbwheel is moved up. The OFF position
will shut off the lamp completely, even when a door
is opened.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Move the thumbwheel right to brighten the lights and left
to dim them.

3-1 6

Trunk Lamp

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

The trunk lamp comes on when you open your trunk.

To use the lighter, just push it in all the way and let go.

Battery Run-Down Protection

Nofices Don’t put papers or other flammable
items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or otlher
smoking materials could ignite them, causing
SI damaging fire.

Your vehicle has a battery run-down feature designed to
protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading lamps, dome
lamp or glove box) is left on when the ignition is turned
off, the battery run-down protection system will
automatically shut the lamp off after 20 minutes. This
will avoid draining the battery.
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:

Nofice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your
hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element whenit’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element. It can also blow
the fuse.

Lift the driver’s door handle,
open any door or
press any remote keyless entry transmitter button
(if equipped),
press the power door lock switch,
~r~~~
rei-,-iGteti-Ufik
Gr
turn the lamp that was left on to off and then to on
again.

3-17

Climate Controls

(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.

Climate Control System

tf;’ (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air

With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.

instrument panel outlets, then directs most of the
remaining air to the floor outlets with some air directed
at the side windows.

to the

(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side windows.

The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.

@ (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Operation
To change the current mode, select one of the following:

f;’

(MAX): This mode is used for maximum cooling.
It will recirculate much of the air inside your vehicle.
It maximizes your air conditioner’s performance and your
vehicle’s fuel economy. The air-conditioning compressor
will run automatically in this mode when it is needed
to help dry the air in the vehicle.

3-18

Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to manually increase or decrease
the temperature inside your vehicle.
When it’s cold outside 0°F (-18°C) or lower, use the
engine coolant heater, if equipped, to provide warmer air
faster to your vehicle. An engine coolant heater warms
the coolant that the engine uses to provide heat to
warm the inside of your vehicle. For more information,
see Engine Coolant Heater on page 2-22.

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air-conditioning system on or off. When N C is pressed,
an indicator light above the button will come on to let
you know that air conditioning is activated. The fan knob
must be set to a speed for the air conditioning to
operate.

Defogging and Defrosting
There are two modes to choose from to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.

Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
select defog or defrost mode.

For quick cool down on hot days:

windshield with most of the remaining air directed to the
floor outlets and some air directed at the side windows.
When you select this mode, the system turns off
recirculation automatically and runs the air-conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode.

1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select N C .
4. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become
tc dry. Tc prevent this frcl?? hsppenin& s!?er the 2i!- i!7
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning Gf! the engine. This is nCx??ml.

+3(Defog): This mode directs half of the air to the

To help clear the side windows quickly while using air
conditioning, do the following:
1. Select the bi-level mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select N C .

4. Select the temperature.

3-19

9 FRONT (Defrost):

This mode directs most of the
air to the windshield, with some air directed to the
floor outlets. In this mode, the system will automatically
turn off recirculation and run the air-conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. Recirculation cannot be selected while
in the defrost mode.
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:
1. Select the defrost mode.
2. Select the highest temperature.

3. Select the highest fan speed.

Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger
outlets located on the outside of the side instrument
panel outlets. To help clear the side windows quickly, do
the following:
1. Select the floor mode.

2. Select the highest temperature.

3. Select the highest fan speed.

3-20

Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog of frost from the rear window.

REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light above the
button will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated. Be sure to clear as much snow
from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately
five minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.

Outlet Adjustment

Use the louvers on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
0

Operation Tips
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.

Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is
encountered, use the MAX mode, with the
temperature knob at a comfortable setting to
prevent the odor from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system. This can be helpful when
driving through a long tunnel with poor ventilation.
However, extended usage of this mode in cold
or cool weather can cause window fogging.

3-2 1

Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators

engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.

This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.

3-22

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly - and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.

Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, how much fuel you have, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
Your vehicle has this cluster or one very similar to it. It includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained
on the following pages. Be sure to read about them.

3-23

Speedometer and Odometer

Tachometer

Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone tries to
turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.

Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven
since you last reset it.
The reset button is located below the tachometer. To
reset the trip odometer to zero, press and holdbriefly the
ribbed side of the button while the trip odometer is
displayed. Also, by pressing this button for less than one
second you can toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer.
3-24

The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: Do not operate the engine with the
tachometer in the red area, or engine damage
may occur.

Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver's safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.

AIR
BAG

This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system
is ready.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.

If the driver's belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.

Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks
the air bag's electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag modules, the wiring and the
crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the air bag system, see Supplemental
Rnctmint Cwctnm /.CR.S)
\"'
0.n p ~ 1-53.
p
I

'""'1UIII.

V
J
I
V
L
"
'

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
couid e v e n inbit: wiiiiuui a CfaSi-1. Tu ii&p
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.

'V,

3-25

The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Charging System Light

The charging system light
will come on when you
turn on the ignition, but the
engine is not running, as
a check to show you it
is working.

When the engine is running, the light should go out.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving and you
hear a chime, you may have a problem with the
electrical charging system. It could indicate that you
have a loose generator drive belt or another electrical
problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while
this light is on could drain your battery.

3-26

If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.

Up-Shift Light
If your manual transaxle
vehicle has this feature
this light comes on
when you need to shift to
the next higher gear.
See Manual Transaxle
Operation on page 2-27.

Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.

BRAKE

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-32.

~~~

United States

Canada

This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.

Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

3-27

Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
If your vehicle has the
anti-lock brake system, the
light will come on when
your engine is started and
may stay on for several
seconds. That’s normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays
on, or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning
light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-26 earlier in this
section.

The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is
normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-28

Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light

TRAC
OFF

If your vehicle has the
Enhanced Traction System
(ETS), this warning light
should come on briefly as
you start the engine.

If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on when you’re
driving, there may be a problem with your Enhanced
Traction System and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come
on for the following reasons:
0

If you turn the system off by pressing the ETS
button on the center console near the gear
shift lever, the warning light will come on and stay
on. To turn the system back on, press the button
again. The warning light should go off. See
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-9 for
more information.

If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road,
the warning light may come on momentarily but will
go off again when the vehicle leaves the rough
surface.

If the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on and the parking brake is fully
released, your vehicle needs service.

Enhanced Traction System
Active Light

LOW
TRAC

If your vehicle has the
Enhanced Traction System
(ET§), this light will
come on when the system
is limiting wheel spin.

Slippery road conditions may exist if the Enhanced
Traction System active light comes on, so adjust your
driving accordingly.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the
Enhanced Traction System stops limiting wheel spin.
The Enhanced Traction System active light also comes
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
there to tell you when the system is active.

3-29

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

Low Coolant Warning Light
This light comes on briefly
when you turn your
ignition on.

COOLANT

L
United States

Canada

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, the light comes
on and you hear a chime, your engine is too hot! It
means that your engine coolant has overheated. See
Engine Overheating on page 5-26.

If this light comes on and stays on and you hear a
chime, the coolant level in your vehicle is low.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-23. If the light is on
along with an overheat warning, you may have a serious
overheating problem. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-30.
Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26 for information
on what to do.
Your vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible.

3-30

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light

SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON

Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.

This system is called OBD I I (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated
by the system before any problem is apparent. This
may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service
technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be 85 gcod and yaur engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by yourwarramty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement ofthe original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may causethis light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered &y your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
e

Light Flashing - A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center
diagnosis and service may be required.

Light On Steady - An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.

3-31

If the Light Is Flashing

If the Light Is On Steady

The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:

You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:

Reducing vehicle speed.

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

Avoiding hard accelerations.

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.

Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being h%uled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle
to your dealer or qualified service center for service.

3-32

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check
the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.

Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system, The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down, The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service
center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.

3-33

Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on and you will hear
a chime when you are
driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
When the ignition is on but the engine is not running,
the light will come on as a test to show you it is working,
but the light will go out when the engine is running. If
it doesn’t come on with the ignition on, you may have a
problem with the bulb. Have it fixed right away.

3-34

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure
is low. If
you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly andis not covered by
your warranty.

Low Oil Level Light

LOW
OIL

If your vehicle is equipped
with a 3400 V6 engine,
then you will have a LOW
OIL light in your
instrument panel cluster.

This light will come on briefly when you start your
vehicle.
If the light stays on after starting your vehicle, or comes
on and chimes while you are driving, your engine oil
level should be checked.
Prior to checking the oil level, be sure your vehicle has
been shut off for several minutes and is on a level
surface. Check the oil level on your dipstick and bring it
to the proper level. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
A false LOW OIL light may be generated when parking
on steep grades.
The oil level monitoring system only checks oil level
during the brief period between when the key is on and
the engine is cranking. It does not monitor engine oil

level when the engine is running. Additionally, an oil
level check is only performed if the engine has
been turned off for a considerable period of time
allowing the oil normally in circulation to drain back into
the oil pan.

CHANGE
OIL

The CHANGE OIL light
should come on briefly as
a bulb check when you
start the engine. If the light
doesn’t come on, have it
serviced.

If the CHANGE OIL light comes on and stays on after
you start the engine, have the oil changed.

To reset the CHANGE OIL light, see Engine oil On
page 5- 15.

3-35

Service Vehicle Soon Light

Security Light

SECURITY

This light will come on
when you turn the key to
ON and will stay on
until the vehicle starts.

If you’re driving and the security light comes on and
remains on, your Passlock@ systemis not working
properly. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock@
and you should see your dealer.

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition. It will also stay
on, or come on and a
chime will sound, if
the windshield washer fluid
reservoir is less than
one-third full.

3-36

SERVICE
VEHICLE
SOON

This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition to ON.

It will stay on, or come on and a chime will sound if it
detects a problem on the vehicle, such as a Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) or an automatic headlamp
system malfunction. If this happens, see your dealer as
soon as possible.

Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

Fuel Gage

At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.

The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
I

United States

Canada

The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left, when the ignition is on. When the indicator nears
empty, the light will come on and you will hear a chime.
You still have a little fuel left, but you should get
more soon.

3-37

Audio System(s)
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle - like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio - be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
Delphi Electronics radio or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment that
has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.

Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself
with it first. Find out what your audio system can do and
how to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re
getting the most out of the advanced engineering that
went into it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power under Ignition Positions on page 2-18.

Setting the Time for Radios
without Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for two seconds.
Then press the HR arrow until the correct hour appears
on the display. Press and hold the MIN arrow until
the correct minute appears. The time may be set with
the ignition on or off.

3-38

Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)

Radio with CD (Base Level)

Press and hold HR or MIN for two seconds. Then press
and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. AM will also appear. Press and hold MlN until
the correct minute appears on the display. The time may
be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold HR and MIN at the same time for two seconds until
UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on
the display instead.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes before pressing and holding the HR and
MIN buttons will result in an update to the time.

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between time and radio station frequency. Time display
is available with the ignition turned off.

3-39

Finding a Station

Setting Preset Stations

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI
and FM2. The display will show your selection.

The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM,
six FMI and six FM2) by performing the following
steps:

TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.

a SEEK D : Press the right or the left arrow to tune
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold one of the SEEK
arrows for two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio
will go to a station, play for a few seconds and flash
the station frequency, then go on to the next station.
Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds and
flash the station frequency, then go on to the next
preset station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to
stop scanning presets.
The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.

3-40

1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select AM, FMI or FM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
AUDIO: To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the AUDIO button repeatedly until BAS or TRE
appears on the display. Then press and hold the up
or the down arrow to increase or to decrease. If a station
is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the
treble.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold the AUDIO button for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. B and
a zero or T and a zero will appear on the display.

To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function, or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to time of day. Then press and hold the AUDIO
button for more than two seconds until you hear a
beep. CEN will appear on the display.

To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function, or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN
will appear on the display.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

Radio Messages

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release the AUDIO
button until BAL appears on the display. Then press and
hold the up or the down arrow to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.

CAL (Calibration): Your audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that your radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealership for service.

To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
press and release the AUDIO button until FAD
appears on the display. Then press and hold the up or
the down arrow to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.

LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK@system has locked up. You must
return to the dealership for service.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
n

A I

DHL UI

rnu.

TI-

II I ~ I p
I eas

n I ~ n I-..
~ n
CAIIU I i u i u HWUIU
IUI 111u1e
-._-I

I-

-1-1

than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero
or F and a zero will appear on the display.

Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
mInw,-.v

tJlCdy&l

1.,;11

VVlll

3 1 1

pull I 1 II 1.

Thn A ; n n e h n a l l A
I I I G

knmim

U13b J I l V U l U UGYII I

.-~lo~t;mm
Thn

pluyll 1

3 .

I (IC.

display will show CD. If you want to insert a compact
disc with the ignition off, first press RCL or the eject
button.
If an error appears on the display, see ‘Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.

3-41

1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track if the current track has been playing
for less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current
track has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current track. The track
number will appear on the display. If you hold the
pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving back through the disc.

2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
The track number will appear on the display. If you
hold the pushbutton or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the disc.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The display will show elapsed time while
reversing.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Release it to play
the passage. The display will show elapsed time while
forwarding.

,
-'s:

5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off
random play. OFF will appear on the display.

c
R

6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. RPT will appear on the display.
The current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT
again to turn off repeated play. OFF will appear on the
display.

a SEEK D : Press the right or the

left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous track. The track number
will appear on the display.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see the current track
number or how long the current track has been
playing.

AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player. The disc will stop but remain in the
player.
CD: With a compact disc in the player and the radio
playing, press this button to play the compact disc. CD
will appear on the display.

(Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.

Compact Disc Messages

Radio with CD (Up Level)

If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
e

It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.

The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Monsoon audio
system, included are eight speakers and an eight
channel amplifier. The radio will display MONSOON
when the radio or the ignition is turned on. See
your dealer for details.

Radio Data System (RBS): Your audio system is
equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS
features are available for use only on FM stations that
broadcast RDS information.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
display messages from radio stations, and
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.

3-44

XMTMRadio Satellite Service (USA Only): XMTMis a
continental U.S. based satellite radio service that
offers 100 coast to coast channels including music,
news, sports, talk and children’s programming. XMTM
provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XMTMservice. For more
information, contact XMTMat www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (Canada Only): DAB
is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers
digital quality audio and text information including song
title, artist name, traffic, weather, emergency
announcements and more. Digital Audio Broadcast
transmission services are currently available in Toronto,
Montreal, Vancouver, Ottawa, and Windsor. In fringe
areas signals may be interrupted by buildings, trees and
other obstructions. Additional services will be added
in the future. For current DAB coverage and other
information consult the GM Canada website at
www.gmcanada.com, your dealer or call
1-800-263-3777.

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn the
decrease volume.

to turn the system on

knob to increase or to

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher choice allows
for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the
volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to
you as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV,
select OFF.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
n
rusilirly iiris krlui, wiiil iile iyrliiivrl uii wiii dispiay
the time.

For XMTM(USA only, if your radio is equipped with
XMTMSatellite Radio Service), pressing this button while
in XMTMmode to retrieve various pieces of information
related to the current song or channel. By pressing
and releasing the RCL button, you may retrieve
four different categories of information: Artist,
Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/
Channel Name.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), pushing this knob switches the display between
channel name and PTY name.
To change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.

Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI,
FM2, or XMI, XM2 (USA only, if your radio is
equipped with XMTMSatellite Radio Service) or DAB1 or
D A W (Canaaa oniy, it your raaio is equippea witn
DAB). The display will show your selection.

3-45

TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the
DAB frequency range. Turning this knob will tune up or
tune down the range. The radio will display the letter
L with a number next to it (1 through 23). Each L number
refers to a frequency and there can be multiple
stations contained in one frequency. It may also take a
few seconds, once you have tuned to a frequency,
for that frequency to gather all of the stations.
Depending on how many stations are within a frequency,
with every tune up or down, you may be tuning to
another station or to another frequency. The display will
show your selections.

SEEK 7: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.

The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.

3-46

To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
SCAN arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN
and the preset number appear on the display. You
will hear a double beep. The radio will go to the first
preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.

Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six AM,
six FMI and six FM2, six XMI and six XM2 (USA
only, if your radio is equipped with the XMTMSatellite
Radio Service) or DAB1 and DAB2 (Canada only, if your
radio is equipped with DAB), by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select AM, FMI or FM2, or XMI,
XM2, or DABI, DAB2.
3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will also be automatically selected for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (BasdTreble)
TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID
or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the tone control can be
adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to
decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
To adjust all of the tone controls to the middle position,
press and hold TONE until FLAT appears on the
display.

EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
bass, mid and treble equalization settings.

You can set up to six customized equalization settings
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the PONE button and the SELECT knob to
create the desired equalization.

3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.
SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the
EQ symbol will flash.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the
desired EQ number.
5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT
knob to store the equalization setting and the
number. You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will
appear on the display.

6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings and
numbers.
EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with
talk radio, but it can be preset to a different tone.

3-47

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): Press and release this button until
BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator
will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted.
Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the
left or the right speakers.
FADE: Press and release this button until FADE
appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator will
light to show that the speakers can be adjusted.
Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the
front or the speakers.

Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for two
seconds will return all speaker settings to the middle
position.

Finding a PTY Station (RDS, XMTM
and DAB)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE. PTY will be displayed on
the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the SELECT knob.

3-48

3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.

4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display
the category and then to go to another station.

SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE. PTY will be displayed on the

screen.
2. Select a category by turning the SELECT knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a
particular station.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same programming. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations.
This function does not apply for XMTMor DAB.

1. Press BAND to select FMI or FM2.
2. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode.

3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.

RDS and DAB Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-49

TRAF (Traffic): TRAF will appear on the display if the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. To
receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station,
press this button. Brackets will be displayed around
TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when
a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), when the TRAF button is pressed, DAB does not
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. DAB only
checks the current frequency for traffic support.

3-50

Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a CD, or XMTM, orDAB station. Press the
TRAF button. The radio will seek to a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements. When the radio finds
a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it
will stop. Brackets around TRAF will appear on the
display. When a traffic announcement comes on
the station that was found, you will hear it. When the
traffic announcement is over, the radio will resume play
of the CD, or XMTM,or DAB station. If no station is
found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: Your audio system has been calibrated
for your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display, it means that your radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and must be
returned to the dealership for service.

XMTMRadio Messages
Radio Display
Message

Action Required

condition

XL (Explicit Language
Channels)

XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating

Updating encryption
code

The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.

No Signal

Loss of signal

Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM

Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)

Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.

CH Off Air
CH Unavail

I Channel not in service
I Channel no longer

I avaiiabie

This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
I une to another station. if tnis station was one oi your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.

No Info

Artist Name/Feature not
available

No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.

No Info

Song/Program Title not
available

No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly. -3-51

XMTMRadio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

No Info

Category Name not
available

No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.

No Info

No Text/lnformational
message available

No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. Your system is working properly.

Not Found

No channel available for
the chosen category

There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.

XM Locked

Theft lock active

The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.

~~~

Radio ID

Radio ID label
(channel 0)

If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate your service.

Unknown

Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)

If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Chk XMRcvr

Hardware failure

If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.

3-52

Playing a Compact Disc
With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc
should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when
the ignition is off, first press the eject symbol or push the
RCL knob. If you insert a CD with the radio off and
the ignition on, it will start to play.
When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will
be activated each time you play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.

If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.

DD 1 (Forward):

Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.

RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM and the track number will appear on the display.

4
(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show elapsed time.

EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desired
customized equalization setting while playing a compact
disc. The equalization will be automatically set
whenever you play a compact disc. See “EQ” listed
previously for more information.

SEEK
: Press the down arrow while playing a
CD to go to the start of the current track if more
than eight seconds have played. Press the up arrow to
go to the next track. If you press either arrow more
than once, the player will continue moving backward or
forward through the disc.

3-53

SCAN
: Press and hold one of the arrows for
more than two seconds until SCAN and the track
number appear on the display and you hear a beep.
The disc will go to the next track, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next track. Press this button again
to stop scanning.

RCL (Recall): Push this button to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default on
the display (track and elapsed time), push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default. While elapsed time is showing, CD
TIME will appear on the display.

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display and the disc comes out, it could be for one of
the following reasons:

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
compact disc when listening to the radio. CD will appear
on the display when a compact disc is loaded.

3-54

(Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.

Compact Disc Messages

You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.

Radio with Cassette and CD

display messages from radio stations, and

seek to stations with traffic announcements.

This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.

If your vehicle is equipped with this Monsoon audio
system, included are eight speakers and an eight
channel amplifier. The radio will display MONSOON
when the radio or the ignition is turned on. See
your dealer for details.
Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is
equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS
features are available for use only on FM stations that
broadcast RDS information.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
e receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,

While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.

LILIL,

c(I I U

t ,,-I I N U " I

I".

VV.

I"-

3-55

Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (Canada Only): DAB
is a Canadian land-based radio service that offers
digital quality audio and text information including song
title, artist name, traffic, weather, emergency
announcements and more. Digital Audio Broadcast
transmission services are currently available in Toronto,
Montreal, Vancouver, Ottawa, and Windsor. In fringe
areas signals may be interrupted by buildings, trees and
other obstructions. Additional services will be added
in the future. For current DAB coverage and other
information consult the GM Canada website at
www.gmcanada.com, your dealer or call
1-800-263-3777.

Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher choice allows
for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

3-56

Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the
volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to
you as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV,
select OFF.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display
the time.
For XMTM(USA only, if your radio is equipped with
XMTMSatellite Radio Service), pressing this button while
in XMTMmode to retrieve various pieces of information
related to the current song or channel. By pressing
and releasing the RCL button, you may retrieve
four different categories of information: Artist,
Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/
Channel Name.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), pushing this knob switches the display between
channel name and PTY name.
To change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.

Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM,
FM2, or XM1, XM2 (USA only, if your radio is equipped
with XMTMSatellite Radio Service) or DAB1, DAB2
(Canada only, if your radio is equipped with DAB). The
display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), the TUNE knob allows you to navigate the
DAB frequency range. Turning this knob will tune up or
tune down the range. The radio will display the letter
L with a number next to it (1 through 23). Each L number
refers to a frequency and there can be multiple
stations contained in one frequency. It may also take a
few seconds, once you have tuned to a frequency,
for that frequency to gather all of the stations.
Depending on how many stations are within a frequency,
with every tune up or down, you may be tuning to
another station or to another frequency. The display will
show your selections.

SEEK
: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.

SCAN
: Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows
for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display
and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold one of the
SCAN arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN
and the preset number appear on the display. You
will hear a double beep. The radio will go to the first
preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal

3-57

Setting Preset Stations

Setting the Tone (BassRreble)

The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six AM,
six FM1 and six FM2, six XM1 and six XM2 (USA
only, if your radio is equipped with the XMTMSatellite
Radio Service) or DAB1 and DAB2 (Canada only, if your
radio is equipped with DAB), by performing the
following steps:

TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID
or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the tone control can be
adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to
decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2,or XM1,
XM2, or DABI, DAB2
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will also be automatically selected for that
pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

To adjust all of the tone controls to the middle position,
press and hold TONE until FLAT appears on the
display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
bass, mid and treble equalization settings.

You can set up to six customized equalization settings
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to
create the desired equalization.
3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.
SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the
EQ symbol will flash.

4. Press the EQ button or turn the SELECT knob to
select the desired EQ setting number.

3-58

5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT
knob to store the equalization setting and the
number. You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will
appear on the display.
6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings and
numbers.

EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for

use with

talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone.

Finding a PTY Station (RIDS, XMTM
and DAB)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
I . Press PROG TYPE. PTY will be displayed on
the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the SELECT knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (BalancdFade)

3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category's first station.

BAL (Balance): Press and release this button until
BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator
will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted.
Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the
left or the right speakers.

FADE: Press and release this button until FADE
appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator will
light to show that the speakers can be adjusted.
Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for two
seconds will return all tone settings to flat regardless of
tone selected. FLAT will appear on the display.

SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a category by performing the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE. PTY will be displayed on the
screen.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning within your chosen category.
4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a
particular statio!?.

3-59

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite program types (PTYs). These pushbuttons
have factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.

3-60

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return, if program type select mode
is activated.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

RDS and DAB Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or a compact disc is playing. If
the cassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play
will stop during the announcement. You will not be
able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will
appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): TRAF will appear on the display if the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. To
receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station,
press this button. Brackets will be displayed around
TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and when

+rnG;-

m m n n l ~ n r r n r n n n tcnmnc

tIUIIICI U I I I I " L 4 I I " " I I I U I I L

""l#l"V

nn
" I ,

thn tllnnd radin
. # I "

L U l l V U

I--.-

For DAB (Canada only, if your radio is equipped with
DAB), when the TRAF button is pressed, DAB does not
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic. DAB only
checks the current frequency for traffic support.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a CD, or XMTM,or DAB station. Press the
TRAF button. The radio will seek to a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements. When the radio finds
a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it
will stop. Brackets around TRAF will appear on the
display. When a traffic announcement comes on
the station that was found, you will hear it. When the
traffic announcement is over, the radio will resume play
of the CD, or XMTM,or DAB station. If no station is
found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

station you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

3-6 1

XMTMRadio Messages
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

XL (Explicit Language
Channels)

XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating

Updating encryption
code

The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.

No Signal

Loss of signal

Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM

Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)

Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear
shortlv.
. .

CH Off Air

Chatme1 not in service

This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.

CH Unavail

Channel no longer
available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.

No Info

Artist Name/Feature not
available

No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.

No Info

Song/Program Title not
available

No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.

3-62

XMTMRadio Messaqes (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message

Condition

Action Required

No Info
No Info

Radio ID

Radio ID label

3-63

Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is
off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. If
you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not
be in squarely. Press the eject button to remove the
tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, BAL, FADE,
TONE, EQ and SEEK controls just as you do for
the radio. The display will show TAPE and an arrow
showing which side of the tape is playing. The
tape player automatically begins playing the other side
when it reaches the end of the tape.
Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted. If you want to insert a
tape while the ignition is off, first press the eject button
or push the RCL knob.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.

3-64

DD 1 (Forward):

Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly to another part of the tape. Press this pushbutton
again to return to playing speed. The radio will play
while the tape advances. You may select stations during
forward operation by using TUNE, SEEK and SCAN.
While in forward mode, the display will show FREQ and
FWD and two right arrows. If the radio is playing a
RDS station, the display will only show FREQ.

2 (Side): Press this pushbutton to play the other
side of the tape.

4
(Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The radio will play the tape reverses. You may
select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE,
SEEK and SCAN.
EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desired
customized equalization setting while playing a cassette.
The equalization will be automatically set whenever
you play a cassette tape. See “EQ” listed previously for
more information.

SEEK
: Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for seek to
work. Press the up or the down arrow to search for
the next or the previous selection on the tape. You can
skip as many as nine selections up or down on the
tape. Choose how many selections you want to skip,
then press the SEEK arrow that many times. The
number of selections to be skipped will appear on the
display.

SCAN
: Press and hold one of the arrows for
more than two seconds until SCAN appears on
the display and you hear a beep. The tape will go to the
next selection, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next selection. The tape will scan in forward
only. Press this button again to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
tape is playing. The inactive tape or CD will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
CD TAPE: Press this button to switch between playing
a cassette tape and a compact disc, if both are
loaded, when listening to the radio. The display will
show tape and CD symbols.

(Eject): Press this button, located next to the
cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Eject may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.

Cassette Tape Messages
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
could be for one of the following reasons:

TIGHT TAPE: This message is displayed when the
tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape hubs.
Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down
and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a
pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not
turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should
not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure
your player is working properly.
BROKEN TAPE: This message is displayed when the
tape is broken. Try a new tape.
WRAPPED TAPE: This message is displayed when the
tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt to get
the cassette out. Try a new tape.

3-65

CLEAN PLAYER: If this message appears on the
display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It
will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-70.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.

CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after disabling the
tight/loose tape sensing feature on your tape player.
To disable the feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the CD TAPE button. The radio will
display READY and flash the cassette symbol.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.

The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.

3-66

DD 1 (Forward):

Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show elapsed time.
RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM and the track number will appear on the display.

4
(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show elapsed time.

SCAN
: Press and hold one of the arrows for
more than two seconds until SCAN and the track
number appear on the display and you hear a beep.
The disc will go to the next track, play for a few seconds,
!!?%
nn
Y’
n n ?e the next t r x k Press this hL!ttQr! S@r!
to stop scanning.

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display (track or elapsed time), push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default, While elapsed time is showing,
CD TIME will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing.
CD TAPE: Press this button to switch between playing
a cassette tape and a compact disc if both are
loaded, when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening. The display will show tape and CD symbols.

(Eject): Press this button, located next to the
CD slot, to eject a CD. Eject may be activated with either
the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the
radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.

-“

3-67

Compact Disc Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display and the disc comes out, it could be for one of
the following reasons:

Theft-Deterrent Feature
(Non-RDS Radios)

The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.

THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will
not operate and LOC will be displayed.

The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

w i t h THEFTLOCK@activated, your radio will not
operate if stolen.

You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother, the disc should play.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.

Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will
not operate and LOCKED will be displayed.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK@is armed.
With THEFTLOCK@activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.

3-68

Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on your steering
wheel.

PRESET: Press this button to play a station you have
programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons. Every
press of this button will take you to the next preset
station that you have prgrammed. If a cassette tape is
playing, press this button to play the other side of
the tape.
BAND: Press this button to choose AM, FMI, FM2, or
XM1 or XM2, or DAB1 or DAB2. If a cassette tape
or compact disc is playing, it will stop and the radio
will play.

VOLUME
: Press the upor the down arrow to
increase or to decrease volume.

PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
compact disc when listening to the radio.

SEEK
Press the up or the down arrow to tune
to the next or to the previous radio station. If a
cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the player will
zwi\mn~
\A!ith
~ thp [Ip a.rrn\A/ a.nd reverse with the
down arrow.

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again, or any other radio button, to turn on the sound.

3-69

Understanding Radio Reception
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.

FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.

XMTMSatellite Radio Service
XMTMSatellite Radio gives you digital radio reception
from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings
or hills can interfere with Satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to come and go. Your radio may display
"NO SIGNAL" to indicate interference.

3-70

DAB Radio
DAB gives you digital radio reception. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with radio signals,
causing the sound to come and go. Your radio
may display "NO SIGNAL" to indicate interference.

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren't, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio will display CLEAN
PLAYER to indicate that you have used your tape
player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean
timer. If this message appears on the display, your
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice
a reduction in sound quality, try a known good
cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound
quality, clean the tape player.

For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership.
The broken tape detection feature of your cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette as a
damaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the CD TAPE button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display for five
seconds.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.

After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the broken tape
detection feature will be active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will

not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYER
indicator. The radio will display CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.

Care of Your CDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
nanaiing aiscs. Pick up aiscs by grasping ihe ouier
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

3-71

Care of Your CD Player

DAB Radio Antenna System

The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Your DAB antenna is located on the roof of your
vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build
up for clear radio reception.

Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals,
you should replace it.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.

XM Satellite Radio Antenna System
Your XMTMSatellite Radio antenna is located on the
roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of your XM system may be affected if
your sunroof is open.

3-72

If your vehicle is purchased in Canada and driven
into the United Stated the DAB radio antenna system
will not function. DAB radio reception is available
in Canada only.

The performance of your DAB antenna may be affected
if your sunroof is open.

Chime Level Adjustment
Chime level adjustment is only available on RDS radios.
The volume level of the vehicle’s chimes can be
controlled by the radio. To change the volume level,
press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the
radio power off. The chime volume level will change
from the normal level to loud, and LOUD will be
displayed on the radio. To change back to the default or
normal setting, press and hold pushbutton 6 again.
The chime level will change from the loud level
to normal, and NORMAL will be displayed.

Section 4

Driving Your Vehicle

Your Driving. the Road. and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ........................................... 4.2
Drunken Driving ............................................. 4.2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................ 4-6
4-6
Braking .........................................................
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ..................... 4-9
Steering ...................................................... 4-1 1
Off-Road Recovery ....................................... 4-13
Passing ....................................................... 4-14
Loss of Control ............................................. 4-15
Driving at Night ............................................ 4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet
Roads .................. 4-19

City Driving .................................................. 4-21
Freeway Driving ........................................... 4.22
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................... 4-23
Highway Hypnosis ........................................ 4.24
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................ 4-25
Winter Driving .............................................. 4.26
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ........4-31
Towing .......................................................... 4.32
Towing Your Vehicle ..................................... 4.32
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................... 4.32
Loading Your Vehicle .................................... 4-35
Towing a Trailer ........................................... 4.37

4- 1

Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task - such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor - makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.

Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-9.

Drunken Driving

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.’’
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.

4-2

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
0

Vision

* Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults - by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population - choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker’s body weight
0

The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 Ib
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 - 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.

4-3

There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.

4-4

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “1’11 be careful” isn’t the right
answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the
street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who
has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in a
crash, that person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than if the person had
not been drinking.

dl CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgement can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious-or
even fatal-collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.

4-5

Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to
do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. Also see Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) on page 4-9.

Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.

4-6

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts - heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking - rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, this warning light
on the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
you start your vehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.

Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here’s what
happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.

4-8

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the
vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but
this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.

If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However, if you don’t have anti-lock,
your first reaction - to hit the brake pedal hard and hold
it down - may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can’t respond
to your steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever
direction it was headed when the wheels stopped rolling.
That could be off the road, into the very thing you
t n r i n n tn
r n i
y l l ILJ
,\,Id,
Gr intG traffic.
L A t a r a

V G IG

If you don’t have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
anti-lock, it’s different. See “Anti-Lock Brakes.’’
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if
it senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and may
aiso upshiii ihe iransaxie io iirrlii wheei spirl.

4-9

LOW
TRAC

This light will come on
when your Enhanced
Traction System is limiting
wheel spin. See
Enhanced Traction System
Active Light on page 3-29.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal. This light will also come on when the anti-lock
brake system is working.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the enhanced
traction system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6.

4-10

The Enhanced Traction System operates in all transaxle
shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the
transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you’ve
chosen, so you should use the lower gears only
when necessary. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on
page 2-24.

TRAC
OFF

When the system is on
and the parking brake is
fully released, this warning
light will come on to let
you know if there’s a
problem.

See Enhanced Traction System Warning Light on
page 3-28. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the Enhanced
Traction System on. But you can turn the system off if
you prefer.

Steering
Power Steerin
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.

Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:

To turn the system on or off, press the ETS button on
the instrument panel.
When you turn the system off, the Enhanced Traction
System warning light will come on and stay on. If
the Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spin
when you press the button to turn the system off,
the warning light will come on - but the system won’t
turn off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer
a current need to limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The Enhanced Traction
System warning light should go off.

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can
control.

4-1 1

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems - steering and braking - have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose
control.
The same thing can happen if you’re steering through a
sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two
control systems - steering and acceleration - can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road
and make you lose control. See Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) on page 4-9.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-12

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action - steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes - but, unless you
have anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.

Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel

---- ..-..
yuu

UI ILG

L-..Il a v

-.,-;&-A +hn -Limn+
t a v w l u t u LI I G V U J G ~ L .

The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

!f the !eve! n f the sholrlder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
tne pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel io yo
straight down the roadway.
4-1 3

Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents - the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:

“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it’s all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-14

Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.

When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move
into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes
up for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.

Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
0

I f you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And In the acceleratlon
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.

4-15

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System, remember:
It helps to avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do
not have the Enhanced Traction System, or if the system
is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.

4-16

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” - and slow
down when you have any doubt.

If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels are
no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired - by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.

Driving at Night

Drive defensively.
Don’t drink and drive.

I
e

e
e

Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
e

4-17

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if
you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.

4-18

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean - inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and
aren’t even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.

,,F
I

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. Qn a wet
reed, yo: cx’f stcp, acce!er2te 9: tnrr! 2s ! ! E ! !
because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left,
you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go
slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are
driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-19

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you
hit them.

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.

Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

4-20

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing
on the road. If you can see reflections from trees,
telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops
“dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badlydamage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you can’t avoid deep puddles or standingwater,
drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

City Driving

Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water crossing,
your vehicle can be carried away. As little as
six inches of flowing water can carry away a
smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other
vehicle occupants could drown. Don’t ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise be very
cautious about trying to drive through flowing
water.
~

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0

Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especiaiiy careiui wnen you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.

Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-53.
4-2 1

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

Freeway Driving

Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

4-22

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
t r n , ur

yvul

en-+
L‘hl;nrl”
UllIlU
spur.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh-such as after a day’s
work-don’t plan to make too many miles that first
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts
in dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if you need it.

4-23

Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the resewior full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?

Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?

There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t
let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave
the road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.

Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?

Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.

Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.

Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.

4-24

Hill and Mountain Roads

Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or lom hill.

If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakeson a steep
downhill slope.

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
drivina in flat or rollinqterrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
w

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N)or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work ai siowing down. I ney cwdd
get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
I
.

4-25

Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gear
possible.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or
cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
e

As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.

You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.

Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

4-26

You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.

Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to
be very careful.

lnrrlulrln I n ;fin c o r q n n r
IIIk.dIUUC/

‘3

ut, l r r b d u l u y b , , u

r r n ~ lh
l rlrrh
U,UY,

VlllUll

hrnnm
u , v . . , , n ,

supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-27

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow - drive with caution.
Keep your Enhanced Traction System on. It will improve
your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery
road. Even though your vehicle has this system, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. See Enhanced Traction System ( € E )
on page 4-9.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock,
see Braking on page 4-6. This system improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking
system or not, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes,

if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the
brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to
get the most traction you can.
Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you’ll just slide. Brake
so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats - anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
* Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
@

4-29

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it or
smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.

4-30

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.

If you let your tires spin at highspeed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fireor other damage.
When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
“Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-60.

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear
(or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If
that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” following.

4-31

Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-32.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle - such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).

4-32

With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
e

What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.

Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-23.

Dinghy Towing
To low your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground,
follow these steps:

11701

4. To prevent your battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the following
fuses from the left side instrument panel fuse block:
WIPER, PCM ACC and IPC/BFC ACC. See
“Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Driver’s Side)” under
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-81 for the
location of these fuses.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY.

6. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
7. Release the parking brake.

Remember to reinstall the fuses once you reach your
destination. To reinstall a fuse do the following:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Put the fuse back in.
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

Notice: Make sure that the towing speed does not
exceed 65 mph (110 km/h), or your vehicle could
be b2d!y dm2ge.r.

3. Set the parking brake.

4-33

Dolly Towing
To tow your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
a dolly, do the following:

Noficer Do not tow your vehicle from the rear. Your
vehicle could be badly damaged and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

~~~~~~~~~~~~~

~~~

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for automatic transaxles
and NEUTRAL for manual transaxles.
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
(For manual transaxle vehicles, the shift lever
must be in REVERSE (R) before removing the key.)
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.

4-34

Loading Your Vehicle

TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
OCCUPANTS
VEHICLE CAP. WT.
CTR.
FRT.
RR.
TOTAL
LBS.
KG

MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
CAPACITY WEIGHT
XXX
COLD TIRE
TIRE SIZE
PRESSURE
SPEED
RTG
PSI/KPa
FRT.
RR.
SPA.
IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1128KPa
SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information
label found on the rear edge of the driver's door tells
you the proper size. speed ratinu and recommended
inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also
gives you important information about the number
of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight
that you can carry. This weight is called the Vehicle
Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of all
occUpanfs, cargo and n o n f a c ~ o r y ~ ~ n options.
s~a~~e~

MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP
DATE
GVWR
GAWR
FRT
GAWR RR

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.

The other label is the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver's door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weiqht Ratinq (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.

4-35

And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out. Don't carry more than 132 Ibs. (60 kg) in
your trunk.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.

4-36

"l, CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weightevenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
Don't leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
e When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
e Don't leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.

Towing a Trailer
Y

If you don’t use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well -- or even
I
~

at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer onlyif
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailerinq capacity is for Vour vehicle, vou
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
It has to he L!sed proper!)/.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.

4-37

Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your
engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.

Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
0
the weight of the trailer,
0

the weight of the trailer tongue

and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 Ibs. (454 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
4-38

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-35 for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35. Then be
sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.

Hitches

It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (6).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. ii iney aren’i, you may be abie to get tnem
right simply by moving some items around in the
trailer.

Will vou have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 2-33. Dirt ana water can, too.

4-39

Safety Chains

Driving with a Trailer

You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes?
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly. And because you have anti-lock brakes,
do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If
you do, both systems won’t work well, or at all.

4-40

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.

Following Distance

Making Turns

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.

Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.

Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
pa.ssed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.

Backing Up

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are
.workjfig.

4-4 1

Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

Parking on Hills

You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.

4-42

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle or into gear for
a manual transaxle, yet. When parking uphill, turn
your wheels away from the curb. When parking
downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an
automatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) for a manual
transaxle.
5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
0

startyourengine,

shift into a gear, and

releasethe parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake

pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.

4-43

4-44

NOTES

Section 5

Service and Appearance Care

Service ............................................................ 5.3
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................ 5-37
Brakes ........................................................ 5.39
Doing Your Own Service Work ......................... 5.3
Battery ........................................................ 5.42
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ...................................................... 5.4
Jump Starting ............................................... 5-43
Fuel ................................................................ 5.5
Bulb Replacement .......................................... 5.49
Halogen Bulbs .............................................. 5.49
Gasoline Octane ............................................ 5.5
Headlamps .................................................. 5.49
Gasoline Specifications .................................... 5.5
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps .............. 5-50
California Fuel ............................................... 5-6
Additives ....................................................... 5-6
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5.50
Fuels in Foreign Countries ............................... 5-7
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5.51
Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 5.51
Filling Your Tank ............................................ 5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... - 5 - 9
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5.52
Checking Things Under
Tires .............................................................. 5.53
the Hood .................................................... 5-10
Inflation ..Tire Pressure ................................ 5-54
Hood Release .............................................. 5-10
Tire Inspection and Rotation ........................... 5-55
Engine Compartment Overview ....................... 5-12
When It Is Time for New Tires ....................... 5-56
Engine Oil ................................................... 5.15
Buying New Tires ......................................... 5-56
Engine Air CleanedFilter ................................ 5-21
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-57
r on
An ntnmntie Trnnr.r-.vln Cln #;PI ..............................
lulu
J-LL
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-59
Manual Transaxle Fluid .................................. 5-22
Wheel Replacement ...................................... 5-59
Hydraulic Clutch ........................................... 5-23
Tire Chains .................................................. 5-60
Engine Coolant ............................................. 5-23
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................ 5-61
Engine Overheating ....................................... 5-26
Changing a Flat Tire ..................................... 5-62
Cooling System ............................................ 5-29
- -Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 5-71
Power Steering Fiuia .................................... ~ 1 - 3 6
I ~ ~ U L W I I I ~ L I WI 1 u l I a U A l G

5- 1

Section 5

Service and Appearance Care

Appearance Care ............................................ 5.72
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-72
Care of Safety Belts ...................................... 5.75
Weatherstrips ............................................... 5.75
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-75
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5.77
Finish Damage ............................................. 5.77
Underbody Maintenance ................................ 5.78
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5.78
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ...........5.78

5-2

Vehicle Identification ...................................... 5.80
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................. 5.80
Service Parts Identification Label ..................... 5.80
Electrical System ............................................ 5.81
Add-on Electrical Equipment .......................... 5.81
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................ 5-81
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-81
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................ 5-81
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-86
Capacities and Specifications ......................... 5-86
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........5-88

Service

Doing Your Own Service Work

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.

If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-9.

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM,
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

ACDel;llo,

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-59.

5-3

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6- 16.

You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.

5-4

Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.

Fuel

Gasoline Specifications

Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.

It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.

Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.

In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.

Canada Only

5-5

California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction lndicator Lamp on page 3-31)
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.

Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
available in your area to contribute to clean air.

5-6

General Motors recommends that you use these
gasolines, particularly if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.

Nofice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.

Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.

Filling Your Tank

The tethered fuel cap is behind a hinged door on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.

Fuel vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t sm&p If yop’rp npzr fee! e!. !.ef&]ng
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.

5-7

I
If you get fuel on yourself and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too
quickly. This spray can happenif your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any
“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all
the way.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap inside the
fuel door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the
right.

5-8

Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle on page 5-75.

When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-3 1.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and maydamage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
0 Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
0 Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
0 Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

5-9

Checking Things Under
the Hood
L%

Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle located
under the instrument
panel on the drivier's side
of the vehicle.

CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
I

5-10

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on
the secondary hood release.

3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop rod from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the
hood marked PROP ROD.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
nooa ana reiurrr iile prop io iis ( e k k ~ e r .the^ k f
the hood down and close it firmly.

5-11

0
w
c
3 0

.
I

>
ti;

A. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
B. Engine Oil Dipstick
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap
D.Brake Fluid Reservoir
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

F. Engine Compartment Fuse Block
G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

H. Battery
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir

5-13

When you open the hood on the 3400 V6 engine, you’ll see the following:

A. Engine Coolant Surge Tank

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

F. Engine Air CleanedFilter

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap

G. Battery

D. Engine Oil Dipstick

H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir

5-14

Engine Oil

LOW
Ole

Checking Engine Oil
If the LOW OIL light
appears on the instrument
cluster, it means you
need to check your engine
oil level right away.

It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

3400 V6 Engine Only

For more information, see Low Oil Level Light on
page 3-35.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
2.2L L4 ECOTEC Engine

5-15

2.2L L4 ECQTEC Engine

3400 V6 Engine

The engine oil dipstick handle is yellow. The dipstick on
the 2.2L L4 ECOTEC engine is located at the front of
the engine compartment. The dipstick on the 3400
V6 engine is located at the front of the engine, behind
the fan. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don't, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-16

3400 V6 Engine

When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the MIN mark for the 2.2L L4
ECOTEC engine or below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick for the 3400 V6 engine, then you’ll
need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use
the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to
use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-86
Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.

For the location of the
engine oil fill cap see
Engine Compartment

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.

5-17

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS

Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use
any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you choose to perform
the engine oil change
service yourself, be sure
the oil you use has
the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil
container. If you have your
oil changed for you, be
sure the oil put into
your engine is American
Petroleum Institute certified
for gasoline engines.

LOOK
FOR MIS
SYMBOL

HOT
WEATHER

ACCEPTABLE

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart.

COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
VlSCOSlN GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED

5-18

As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the
only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle. You
should look for and use only oils which have the API
Starburst symbol and which are also identified as
SAE 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils,
you can use an SAE IOW-30 oil which has the API
Starburst symbol, if it's going to be 0°F (-18°C)
or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, such as
SAE IOW-40 or SAE 20W-50 under any conditions.

Notice: Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@ oilmeets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below -20°F (-29"C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil Additives
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are ail you will need for
good performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil (GNI Oil
Life SystemTM)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL light will come on. Change
your oil as soon as possible within the next two
times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. It is also important to check vour oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.

5-19

How to Reset the Change Oil Light

What to Do with Used Oil

The GM Oil Life SystemTMcalculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE OIL light being turned on, reset the system.

Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset.
To reset the oil life indicator, do the following steps:
1. With the ignition key in ON (a short time after
turning off the engine), press the RESET button
located in the driver’s side instrument panel
fuse block. See “Instrument Panel Fuse Block”
under Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-81.

2. When the CHANGE OIL light starts to flash, press
and hold the RESET button again.
The reset is complete when you hear the chimes and
the CHANGE OIL light goes out.
If your vehicle is equipped with a 2.2L L4 ECOTEC
engine, it has a unique oil filter element. When
reinstalling the filter cap do not exceed 18 Ib ft (25 N*m ).
Inspect the condition of the O-ring and replace if
damaged.
See your dealer for additional information.
5-20

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.

Engine Air Cleanedfilter

3. Check or replace the engine air cleanedfilter.

4. Put the cover back on tightly.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to replace the air filter.
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4.

2.2L L4 ECOTEC Engine shown, 3400 V6 Engine
similar

Operating the engine with the air cleanerifilter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans theair, it stops
flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there
and the engine backfires, you could be burned.
Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working
on the engine with the air cleanedfilteroff.

The engine air cleanedfilter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Cnn

v’lru

f
~ t a y t ~f‘nmnovtmnrrt
V ~
V u
I I ~ ~ U ~ L ~ ~ ~

b t n n t ; - t A ,

I Y
~, U V
Y YY

nn
UV LI ,

-T)NP,

yuyu

E
u

iq C a r
I L

IVI

more information on location.
To check or replace the engine air cleanedfilter, do the
following:
1. Remove the screws that hold the cover on.

ivsrrce: ~i
the air cieaneritiiter is oii, a backiire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleanerifilter in place when
you’re driving.

2. Lift off the cover.

5-21

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have your fluid level checked by
your dealer or service center when you have your oil
changed.

Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON@-Ill, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON@-Ill is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.

When doing frequent trailer towing.
0

Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.

5-22

Manual Transaxle Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have your fluid level checked by
your dealer or service center when you have your oil
changed. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-15 for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic Clutch

How to Check and Add Fluid

The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding
fluid won’t correct a leak.

You do not need to check the fluid level unless you
suspect a clutch problem. To check the fluid level, take
the cap off. If the fluid level reaches the top of the
reservoir, the fluid level is correct. It isn’t a good idea to
top off your clutch fluid. Adding fluid won’t correct a
leak. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem
Have the system inspected and repaired.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.

Engine Coolant

When to Check and What to Use

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
QEX-COOL@engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only QEX-COOL@extended life coolant.

Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine
how often you should
check the fluid level in your
master cylinder reservoir
and for the proper
fluid. See Part B: Owner
Checks and Services
on page 6-9 and Part 19:
Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on
page 6- 15.

The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.

5-23

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL@coolant will:

Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.

What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL@coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.

Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use onlyDEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result.In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner-- at 30,000 miles
(50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new vehicle
warranty.

Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will.Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture canfreeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.

5-24

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.

The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.

Checking Coolant
1

Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap - even a little - when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark, or a little higher.

2.2L L4 ECOTEC Engine shown,
3400 V6 Engine similar

5-25

If theLOW COOLANT light
comes on and stays on, i t
means you’re low on
engine coolant.

LOW
COOLANT
L

r
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

See Low Coolant Warning Light on page 3-30.

Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool. If the surge tank is empty, a special fill
procedure is necessary. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-26 and “How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank under Cooling System on page 5-29
for instructions.

5-26

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.

Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a low
coolant warning light on your vehicle’s instrument panel.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-30
and Low Coolant Warning Light on page 3-30.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engineis
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.

Nofice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.

5-27

If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant light, can
indicate a serious problem. See Low Coolant Warning
Light on page 3-30.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant light, but see or hear no steam, the problem may
not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a
little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.

5-28

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:

CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.

.. ...

2.2L L4 Engine shown, 3400 V6 Engine similar

5-29

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don't touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don't run the engineif there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.

The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it isn't, you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling
system.

5-30

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they aren't, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn't covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
coolant will require change sooner
- at 30,000 miles
(50888 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new vehicle
warranty.

If you haven’t found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level isn’t at or above the FULL
COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL@coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including
the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you
do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for more
information.

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Nofice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.

5-31

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap even a little -- they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.

5-32

CAUTION:

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant
xture.

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-33

2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.

Park the vehicle on a level surface.
You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about two or two and
one-half turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. This will allow any pressure still left to
be vented out the discharge hose.

5-34

3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the hash mark on the label. Wait
about five minutes, then check to see if the level is
below the hash mark. If the level is below the
hash mark, add additional coolant to bring the level
up to the hash mark. Repeat this procedure until
the level remains constant at the hash mark
for at least five minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.

By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the FULL COLD mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the
level reaches the FULL COLD mark.

5-35

Power Steering Fluid

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

See your dealer, if necessary.

L-

When to Check Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for reservoir location.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.

5-36

How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then
remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the
dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.

What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
Recommended Fluids and lubricants on page 6- 15.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer's instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.

Adding Washer Fluid
,- * -,
5

LOW

Your vehicle has a low
washer fluid telltale that
will come on in the
instrument panel cluster
when the washer fluid
is low.

See l o w Washer Fluid Warning light on page 3-36 for
more information.

5-37

The windshield washer
fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment
towards the front of
the vehicle.

Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer
fluid until the tank is full.

Notice:

When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
e

Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution tofreeze and
damage your washer fluid tank andother parts
of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t
clean as well as washer fluid.

Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it’s very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank ifit is completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.

5-38

Brakes
Brake Fluid
A

normal brake lining wear, When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,
or won’t work at all.

So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment. It is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5- 12.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
f l ~ ~~i dn ! when
y
work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.

5-39

BRAKE
United States

Canada

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-26.

What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6- 15.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

5-40

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
Notice:

Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced.
Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See
“Appearance Care” in the Index.

Brake Wear
The GT Series has four-wheel disc brakes and the SE
Series has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).

A CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes won’t work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

If you have rear drum brakes, they don’t have wear
indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or
changing. When you have the front brake pads
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-14.

5-4 1

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your
disc brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a
moderate or heavier stop, then your brakes might not
adjust correctly. If you drive inthat way, then - very
carefully - make a few moderate brake stops about
every 1,000 miles (1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust
properly.

Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system - for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in - be sure

5-42

you get new approved replacement parts. If you don’t,
your brakes may no longer work properly. For example,
if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for
your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear
brakes can change - for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.

Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco@battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco@
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5- 12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.

Vehicle Storage

Jump Starting

If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.

If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature (Non-RDS Radios) on page 3-68 or
T,4ef!-Y“e.)errer?.!=9&.v-t? ( ! ? E .5Cl;E) e.!?,P?,nP 3-68

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
0 They contain acid that can burn
you.
0 They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
They contain enough electricity to
burn you.

If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.

5-43

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can be
damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.

5-44

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter. Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren’t
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.

c
An electric fan can start up evenwhen the
engine is not running and can injureyou. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You
don’t need to add water to the ACDelco@
battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water
to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive
gas could be present.

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.

Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (-) terminal if the vehicle with the dead
battery has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll
qet a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts, too. And don’t connect
the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal
on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

5-45

7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal
of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-46

8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal
of the good battery. Use
a remote negative (-)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (-) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that has the dead battery. If
it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.

Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result from
electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each other or any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.

5-47

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the

1
Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery

5-48

vehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.

Bulb Replacement

Headlamps

For replacement bulb sizes, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 5-51. For any bulb changing procedure not
listed in this section, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

A CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
1, Lift up on the two retaining clips which secure the
headlamp assembly.

5-49

Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps
1. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer to the

removal procedure earlier in this section.
2. Turn the bulb assembly retainer and pull out
the bulb.
3. Unclip the bulb assembly from the wiring harness.

4. When replacing the bulb, be sure to properly
align the bulb with the locating feature in the
assembly.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the bulb
assembly.
2. Lift the headlamp assembly forward, out of the
mounting bracket.

3. Turn the bulb assembly retainer counterclockwise
one-sixth of a turn and pull out the bulb assembly.
4. Unclip the bulb assembly from the wiring harness.
5. After replacing the bulb, reverse Steps 1 through 4
to reinstall the bulb assembly and headlamp
assembly.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
1, Open the trunk lid and locate the center
high-mounted stoplamp on the inside of the lid.
2, Remove the three screws.

3. Gently remove and replace the bulb(s).
4 Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to reassemble the lamp
assembly.

5-50

Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps

4. Carefully remove the taillamps lens from the body
and avoid scratching the paint or dropping it.

1. Disconnect the cargo net in the trunk.

5. Press the five tabs to release the plate from
the lamp.

2. Pull back the trunk trim.

6. Gently pull the bulb out from the socket.
7. Install a new bulb.

8. Reverse Steps 3 through 6 to reinstall the taillamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Stop/Taillamps
3157
- 56
Turn Siunal
Lamps
31
"
For any bulb not listed contact your dealer.
3. Remove the four wing nut bolts which fasten the
taillamp lens to the vehicle.

5-51

Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check’ in At Least Twice a Year on page 6-10 for more
information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove
the wiper blade:

1 . Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.

2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
For the proper type and size, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-86.

5-52

Tires

icle
new Your
comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Pontiac Warranty booklet for details.

CAUTION: (Continued)
0

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION:

(Continued)

Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact - such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.

I
I

5-53

Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is on the rear
edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
Too much flexing
0

Too much heat

Tireoverloading
Bad wear
@

Badhandling
Bad fuel economy

5-54

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
0
Unusual wear
Badhandling
Roughride
0

Needless damage from road hazards

When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).

How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.

Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12 500 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-56 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-59 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See “Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in Section 6, for scheduled
rotation intervals.

n
J

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.

.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-86.

R ust or dirt on awheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time.The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a ciorh or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.

5-55

When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remainina.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.

5-56

The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.

Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare, though. It was developed for
use on your vehicle.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rimflangescoulddevelopcracksafter
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

5-57

Treadwear

Temperature - A, B, C

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.

Traction - AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-58

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new ~ h p pshnulc!
l
h a e the qqme inauj-carryin~
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a flat Tire on page 5-62 for more
information.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
5-59

Used Replacement Wheels

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

If your vehicle has P225/50R16 size tires, don’t
use tire chains, there’s not enoughclearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured ina crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that willfit,
install them on the front tires.

5-60

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/50R16 size tires, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class
“S” type chains that are the proper size for your
tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten them
as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.

If a Tire Goes Flat

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout”, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go, It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop - well off the road if possible.

5-6 1

Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you can put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
other side of the vehicle, at the

5-62

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk.

1. Pull the carpeting from
the floor of the trunk.
Turn the center retainer
nut on the compact spare
tire cover
counterclockwise to
remove it.

2. Lift and remove the cover. See Compact Spare
Tire on page 5-71 later in this section for more
information about the compact spare.

3. Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise and
remove it. Then lift off the
spacer and remove the
compact spare tire.

4. Remove the jack and wheel wrench from the trunk.
Your vehicle’s jack and wheel wrench are stored in
a foam tray. Remove the band around the jack.

5-63

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire

The tools you'll be using include the jack (A) and wheel
wrench (6).

1. If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap that
has plastic wheel nut caps, then loosen the plastic
nut caps (you may need to use the wheel wrench
to loosen them). Do not pry off wheel covers
or center caps that have plastic wheel nut caps.
Then remove the wheel cover or center cap.

5-64

/\ -\

18 inches
(46 cm)

2. Then use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
nuts. Don’t remove them yet.

3. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire. Put the compact spare tire near you.

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.

5-65

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.

5-66

5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
6. Remove the flat tire.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.

8. Install the compact spare tire.

Rust or dirt on thewheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become lccse after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,to
get all the rust or dirt off.

1
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
..-..
I
,
+L- -..+- -:-k&
---- ---- ____.
...
Y W U U W , l i l t l l U L 3 Illlyllb GWIIIC; I W U D C ; . IUUi V V I l G e l
I

could fall off, causing a serious accident.

L--I

9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

I
I

5-67

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel tocome loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replacethem, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See ”Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index forwheel nut
torque specification.

10. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut torque
specification.
Notice: Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put awheel cover on your
compact spare, you could damage the cover or
the spare.

5-68

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
E
F

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.

Store the flat tire in the compact spare tire compartment.
Place the tire in the compartment, then secure the
adapter and wing nut. Place the cover and the nut on
top of the flat tire. Store the jack and the wrench in the
foam tray.

A.
B.
C.
D.

Nut
Cover
Wing Bolt
Adapter

E. Wrench
F.Jack
G. Tool Tray
H. Flat Tire

5-69

Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
E

~~~

The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. See "Compact Spare Tire" later in this
section. See the storage instructions label to replace
your compact spare into your trunk properly.

5-70

A.
B.
C.
D.

Nut
Cover
Wing Bolt
Adapter

E.
F.
G.
H.

Wrench
Jack
Tool Tray
Compact Spare Tire

Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicie, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s
best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in
good shape in case you need it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.

5-71

Appearance Care

They can all be hazardous - some more than
others -and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
0

Alcohol
Laundry Soap

Bleach
Reducing Agents

Never use these to clean your vehicle:

Gasoline

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

Benzene

Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.

Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover

5-72

FabriclCarpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
You can get GM - approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-78.

Here are some cleaning tips:

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems

Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

Clean up stains as soon as you can - before
they set.

Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.

2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.

If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.

Usina Cleaner on Fabric
v

1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.

4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.

Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.

4. Let dry.

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. I f a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.

5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.

6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
5-73

Vinyl

Top of the Instrument Panel

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.

Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do this more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.

Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
e

Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.

5-74

Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.

Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See GM
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-78.
Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing
decals on the inside rear window, since they
may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners
are used on the inside of the rear window, an
electric defogger element may be damaged. Any
temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your Vehicle
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.

Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and lubricants on page 6- 15.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-78. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
-,,-;A
UYWIU

e a n r F - n r \
enr-tnhne
Q U I vuuu ~ L JULUI
I
1-a

-nA

s a n - t n v
V V U L ~ I

~nnttinm

apwiul

~y.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.

5-75

Cleaning Exterior LampdLenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-78.
Your vehicle has a “basecoatlclearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoatlclearcoat paint
finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as

5-76

possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum Wheels

Sheet Metal Damage

Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.

If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always
take
care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish and tires.

Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

5-77

Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated

Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish

Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms; blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-78

Tire

Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner

Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.

Glass Cleaner

Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and finqerprints.

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description

Usage

GM Vehicle CardAppearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description

Removes dirt and grime
Chrome and Wire Wheel
from
chrome wheels and
Cleaner
wire wheel covers.
I

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.

Odor Eliminator

Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carpet.

I Removes dust,

fingerprints, and surface
contaminants, Spray on
wipe off.

Finish Enhancer

Swirl Remover Polish

Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
light surface
contamination.

Cleaner Wax

Removes light scratches
and protects finish.

Usage

See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-15.

5-79

Vehicle Identification

Engine Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the bottom of your spare
tire cover. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order
parts. On this label is:
yourVIN,
themodeldesignation,
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.

5-80

paintinformationand
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-59.

Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
SXLY, ek., the vvipec v v i i i Sup urliii iikle I~IIU~WI
cuuis. i i
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.

Power Windows and Qther Power
Options
A circuit breaker in the fuse panel protects the power
windows. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until
the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of
damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: two
instrument panel fuse blocks and the engine
rmpsrtment !
L
E
?
h!r\Ck.
There are four spare fuses located in the driver’s side
instrument panel end cap for your use.

Instrument Panel Fuse Blocks
There are two fuse panels for your vehic!~.One Is
located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel and
the other is located on the passenger’s side.
5-81

Instrument Panel Fuse Block
(Driver’s Side)
f

OIL
A) WIPER
E) TRUNKREL
RADIO AMP
C) TURN LPS
D) PWR MIRROR
E) AIR BAG
F)BFCBATT
G) PCMACC
H) DRLOCK
I) IPC/ BFC ACC
J) STOP LPS
L) IPC / HVAC BATT

=
E l pq
DR UNLOCK

)

TRUNK REU
RADIO AMP
TURN LPS

5-82

Usage
Power Mirrors
Air Bags
Body Computer (BFC)
Power Control Module (PCM)
Door Lock Motors
Cluster, Body Computer (BFC)
Stop Lamps
Hazard Lamps
HVAC Head, Cluster, Data Link
Connector

Circuit
Breakers
PWR SEAT

Usage

Relay
TRUNK REL
DR UNLOCK
DR LOCK
DRIVER DR
UNLOCK

Usage
Trunk Relay
Door Unlock Relay
Door Lock Relay
Driver’s Door Unlock Relay

DR UNLOCK

Fuses
WIPER

Fuses
PWR MIRROR
AIR BAG
BFC BATT
PCM ACC
DR LOCK
IPC/BFC ACC
STOP LPS
HAZARD LPS
IPC/HVAC
BATT

Usage
Windshield Wiper Motor,
Washer Pump
Trunk Release Relay/Motor,
Audio AmplifiedRFA
Turn Signal Lamps

Power Seats

Instrument Panel Fuse Block
(Passenger’s Side)
SEE OTHER END CAI
FOR FUSE PULLER
& SPARE FUSES
A) INST LPS
B) CRUISE SW LPS
C) CRUISE SW
D) HVAC BLOWER
E) CRUISE
F) FOG LPS
G) INT LPS
H) RADIO BATT
I) SUNROOF

*SEE OWNERS
MANUAL

Fuse
INST LPS
CRUISE
sw LPS
CRUISE SW
HVAC
BLOWER
CRUISE
FOG LPS
INT LPS
RADIO BATT
SUNROOF

Usage
Interior Lamp Dimming
Steering Wheel Cruise Control
Switch Lamps
Steering Wheel Cruise
Control Switches
HVAC Blower Motor
Cruise Control
Fog Lamps
Interior Courtesy Lamps
Radio, XMTMSatellite Radio/DAB
Power Sunroof

Circuit Breaker Usage
PWR
WNDW
Power
Windows
Relay
FOG LPS

Usage
Fog Lamps

5-83

Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment, near the
battery.

Fuse
3

4
5

6
7
8

Fuse
1
2

5-84

Usage
Ignition Switch
Right Electrical Center-Fog Lamps,
Radio, Body Function Control
Module, Interior Lamps

Relays
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Usage
Left Electrical Center-Stop Lamps,
Hazard Lamps, Body Function
Control Module, Cluster, Climate
Control System
Anti-Lock Brakes
Left Electrical Center-Power Seats,
Power Mirrors, Door Locks, Trunk
Release, Audio Amplifier, Remote
Keyless Entry
Not Used
Ignition Switch
Cooling Fan #I
Usage
Rear Defog
Not Used
Starter
Cooling Fan #1
HVAC Blower (Climate Control)
Cooling Fan #2
Cooling Fan

Relays
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Usage
Air Conditioning Compressor
Not Used
Fuel Pump
Automatic Headlamp System
Automatic Headlamp System
Horn
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Fuses
23-32
33
34

Usage
Spare Fuse Holder
Rear Defog
Accessory Power Outlets,
Cigarette Lighter
Generator
Not Used
Air Conditioning Compressor, Body
Function Control Module

35
36
37

3e
39
40

,A t Itnmatir- TrQncQvlo
l,..."l,

IULIV

I U I I"cIt\I"

Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)

Fuses
41
42

43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57

Usage
Ignition System
Back-up Lamps, Brake Transaxle
Shift Interlock
Horn
PCM
Parking Lamps
Climate Control System,
Air Conditioning
Canister Vent Valve, Exhaust
Oxygen Sensors
Fuel Pump, injectors
Not Used
Right Headlamp
Left Headlamp
Cooling Fan #2
HVAC Blower (Climate Control)
Crank
Coolina Fan #2 Ground
Fuse Puller for Mini Fuses
Not Used

5-85

Capacities and Specifications
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in
this manual.

Capacities

I
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Use Refrigerant Oil, R134a Systems

Capacities
English
Ibs.

Metric
0.6 kg 1.4

Automatic Transaxle
Complete Overhaul

9.5 quarts

9.0 L

Cooling System
2.2L L4 t Engine
3400 V6 Engine

8.6 quarts
13.6 quarts

8.2 L
12.9 L

Engine Oil with Filter
2.2L L4 t Engine
3400 V6 Engine

5.0 quarts
4.5 quarts

4.8 L
4.3 L

14.1 gallons

53.4 L

Fuel Tank

5-86

Capacities (cont’d)

Manual Transaxle
Complete

Overhaul

1.7 L

See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15.

Engine SDecifications
42 inch (1.06 rnrn

5-87

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part

Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.2 L L 4 t Engine
3400 V6

A I 172C*
A I 279C*

Engine Oil Filter
2.2 L L 4 t Engine
3400 V6

PF2244G*
PF47*

PCV Valve

CV892C*

Spark Plugs
2.2 L L4 t Engine
3400 V6

41-981 * (Platinum Plug)
41-1 01* (Platinum Plug)

Windshield Wiper Blades
Type
Passenger’s Side
Driver’s Side

Shepherd’s Hook
17.0 inches (43.0 cm)
22.0 inches (56.0 cm)

*ACDelco@part number.
tECOTECTM

5-88

Section 6

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule ...................................... 6.2
Introduction ................................................... 6.2
Your Vehicle and the Environment .................... 6-2
Maintenance Requirements .............................. 6-2
How This Section is Organized ......................... 6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ........... 6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule .................... 6-4
Scheduled Maintenance ................................... 6-5
Part 6:Owner Checks and Services ................. 6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................ 6-9
At Least Once a Month ................................... 6-9
At Least Twice a Year ................................... 6-10

At Least Once a Year ................................... 6.10
Part C : Periodic Maintenance Inspections ......... 6.13
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................ 6-13
Exhaust System Inspection ............................ 6.13
Fuel System Inspection .................................. 6.13
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6.14
Throttle System Inspection ............................. 6.14
Brake System Inspection ................................ 6.14
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-15
Part E: Maintenance Record ........................... 6.16

6-1

Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
IMPORTANT:

KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LWEL AND CHANGEAS
RECOMMENDED

Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow recommended maintenance may not be
covered by warranty.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.

6-2

How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your dealer’s service department or another
qualified service center do these jobs.

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.

“Part €3:Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspectionsyyexplains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center should
perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They
may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty
repairs.

If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering information on page 7-9.

6-3

Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
This part contains engine oil scheduled maintenance
which explains the engine oil life system and how
it indicates when to change the engine oil and filter.
Also, listed are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.

Using Your Maintenance Schedule

This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:

We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we don’t know exactly how
you’ll drive it. You may drive short distances only a few
times a week. Or you may drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands or in many other ways.

carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-35.

Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs may vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.

use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.

6 -4

are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.

Scheduled Maintenance

Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 QQO km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the GM
Oil Life SystemTM(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Reset the system.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6- 13.

Footnotes

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty orlimit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle's useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6- 14.

Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL light will come on. Change
your oil as soon as possible within the next two
times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the svstem
must be reset. It is also important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.

6-5

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on
page 5-75 for information on resetting the system.

22,500 Miles (37 500 km)

After the services are performed, record the date,
odometer reading and who performed the service on the
maintenance record pages in part E of this schedule.

30,000 Miles (50000 km)

An Emission Control Service.

7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
C l Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote f.)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)

6-6

0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)

0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
U Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.

37,500Miles (62 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
u Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If yo u do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

52,500Miles (87 500 km)
L3 Rotate tires. See Tire inspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
B Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.

67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
Ll Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote f.)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-55for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)

6-7

82,500Miles (137 500 km)

0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the

U Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)

vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 40°F (32°C) or
higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
if you do not use your vehicle under anyof these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

97,500 Miles (162 500 km)

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional

U Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for what to use.

0 Rotate tires. See Tire inspection and Rotation on
page 5-55 for proper rotation pattern and additional

information. (See footnote +.)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission

Control Service.

information. (See footnote +.)

100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0 Inspect spark plug wires (except 2.2L Code F

L4 engine). An Emission Control Service.
U Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.

6-8

Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system
and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.

Part B: Owner Checks and Services

Engine Coolant Level Check

Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.

Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23 for further details.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.

At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for further
details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-37 for further
details.

At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tries are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See Tires on
page 5-53 for further details.

Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning sholdd be done every

50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s) on
page 3-38 for further details.

6-9

At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)

Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-75.

Manual Transaxle Check
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. Have the system inspected and repaired if
needed.

Automatic Transaxle Check
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
Check for leaks. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible.

Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-23. A fluid loss in this
system could indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired at once.

At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service

Weatherstrip Lubrication

Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better,' and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6- 15.

Body Lubrication Service

6-10

Lubricate all the door hinges and latches, including
those for the hood and the trunk lid. Part D tells
you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.

Starter Switch Check
1

When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
i i ine starier WOI-KS in any oiner posiiion, your
vehicle needs service.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check

When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
su dace.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-29 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shitt lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs sewice.

6-1 1

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position.

* With an automatic transaxle, the key should turn to
OFF only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
With a manual transaxle, the key should turn to
OFF only when the shift lever is in reverse.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in
OFF.

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL
(N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.

* To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.

Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.

When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.

6-12

Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should /et your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering hformation on page 7-9.

Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-33.

ystem Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.

Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
!ines 2nd hQSPS fcr p p e r hcnk-L!p, hinrlinf& !e=lks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.

6-13

Engine Cooling System Inspection

Brake System Inspection

Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.

Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.

Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.

6-14

Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol
Engine Oil
of the proper viscosity. To determine
the preferred viscosity for your
vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil
on page 5-15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water
and use only DEX-COOL
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Svstem
GM Optikleen Washer Solvent or
Windshield
Washer Solvent equivalent.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S.12345347 in
Hydraulic
Clutch System Canada 10953517, or equivalent
DOT-3 brake fluid).
Usage

Fluid/Lubricant
GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering (GM Part No. U.S. 1052884, in
System
Canada 993294, or equivalent).
DEXRON-Ill Automatic Transmission
Manual
Fluid.
Transaxle
DEXRON-Ill Automatic Transmission
Automatic
Fluid.
Transaxle
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U S . 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Hood Latch
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Assembly,
(GM Part No. U S . 12346293, in
Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723, or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
Spring
NLGl #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Dielectric Silicone Grease
Weatherstrip (a! Part ?!e. V.S. 123?557S, Ir!
Conditioning
Canada 1974984, or equivalent).
Usage

6-15

Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and any
additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record pages.Also,
you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.

Maintenance Record

6-16

Maintenance Record (cont’d)

6-17

Maintenance Record (cont’d)

6-18

Section 7

Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance Information ......................
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................
Customer Assistance Offices ............................
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities ...........................................
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................

7.2
7.2
7.3
7.3
7.5
7.5

Courtesy Transportation .................................. -7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ...................................... 7.8
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................... 7.9
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .......7.9
Service Publications Ordering Information ...........7.9

7- 1

Customer Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

7-2

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804

Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance Off ices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U S . customer wishes to
write to Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to
Pontiac’s Customer Assistance Center.

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
.

7-3

United States

All Overseas Locations

Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S.Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L I H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

7-4

Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P. 11910
Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 01 1-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities

1
~

'
I

This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your
vehicle (hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).

This programcan also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipmentinstallers. The program is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/
lease. See your dealer for
more details or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance PrOgram
Security While You Travel
I-800-ROADSIDE (1-800-762-3743)
As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road.

Pontiac's Roadside Assistance toll-free number is
staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing
minor repair information over the phone or making
arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Pontiac
dealer.
We will provide the following services for
3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:
0

Fuel delivery

Lock-out service (identification required)

Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service

Change a flat tire
Jump starts

7-5

We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of
the following additional services depending on your
needs:
Hotels
Glass replacement
Tire repair facilities
Rental vehicle or taxis
Airports or train stations
Police, fire departments or hospitals
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Pontiac’s comprehensive warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following information to give the advisor:
Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
Vehicle model, year and color
Mileage of vehicle
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
0

7-6

Vehicle license plate number

Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call
away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE
or 1-800-762-3743, text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-888-889-2438.

Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

Courtesy Transportation
Pontiac has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchasehease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty
repairs.

Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the ?2’crkd2y 2s ys2ssib!e tz 2!!z\.V fzr s2,me e2y reptir.

Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Pontiac
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from
the dealership.

Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
. . _ ..I._ ._ . .. ._- .
v v a l I at ~ t yI epail a, y
~ c i ~e ~ kr i-fiay
r
di~rai-lysto ~ i ~ ~ i c j ~
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
,

7-7

may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.

Additional Program lnformation
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance lnformation furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

7-8

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.

Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5

Reporting Safety Defects to General
k,In+nw-

wiukul

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope YOU’IInotify us.
Please call us at 1-800-762-2737, or write:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
~IUC&UICS, a d j u s i I I ~ ~ ~
ar-~rlj
~ i ssp&iic;aiiur~s
,
iur Givi
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

7-9

Service Bulletins

Current and Past Model Order Forms

Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s Information

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-Mastercard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.

Or you can write to:

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

7-10

Helm, Incorporated
P. 0. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207

A
AddingWasher Fluid .......................................
5-37
AdditionalProgram Information ........................... 7-8
Additives, Fuel .................................................
5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................
5-81
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) ............................ 3-41 3-48, 3-59
Air Bag
ReadinessLight ..........................................
3-25
Air Bag System, Supplemental Restraint
System(SRS) .............................................
1-53
Air CleanedFilter, Engine .................................
5-21
All Overseas Locations ......................................
7-4
Aluminum Wheels ...........................................
5-77
AM ...............................................................
3-70
Antenna, Fixed Mast .......................................
3-72
Antenna, XMTMSatellite Radio System ............... 3-72
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light
.............. 3-28
Appearance Care ............................................
5-72
Care of SafetyBelts ....................................
5-75
ChPMim! Psint SFQttinCJ ...............................
5-78
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-72
Cleaning the Outside ofYour Vehicle .............. 5-75
Finish Damage ............................................
5-77
GMVehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 5-78
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
5-77
UnderbodyMaiGtenanee ...............................
5-78
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-75
~

Ashtrays ........................................................
3-17
Audio System(s) .............................................
3-38
Audio Systems
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................
3-69
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................3-70
Care ofYour CD Player ...............................
3-72
Care ofYour CDs ........................................
3-71
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................
3-72
DAB Radio Antenna System ..........................
3-72
Fixed Mast Antenna .....................................
3-72
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
3-55
Radio with CD ....................................
3-39, 3-43
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................
3-39
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-38
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-68
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
3-70
XMTMSatellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-72
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
3-14
Automatic Transaxle ........................................
2-19
5-22
Fluid ..........................................................
Annrqtinn
vy................................................... r ) r ) A
Automatic Transaxle Check ..............................
6-10
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check ............................................. 6-11
I U L I V I I

1L-r

C
Backing Up ....................................................
Battery ..........................................................
Battery Replacement .........................................
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .........................
Body Lubrication Service ..................................
Brake
Parking ......................................................
System Inspection .......................................
System WarningLight ..................................
Brake Adjustment ............................................
Brake Fluid ....................................................
Brake Pedal Travel .........................................
Brake System Warning Light ............................
Brake Wear ...................................................
Brakes ..........................................................
Braking ...........................................................
Braking in Emergencies .....................................
Break-in, NewVehicle .....................................
Bulb Replacement ...........................................
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps .............
Halogen Bulbs ............................................
Headlamps .................................................
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............
Buying New Tires ...........................................
2

4-41
5-42
2-6
3-17
4-23
6-10
2-29
6-14
3-26
5-42
5-39
5-42
3-26
5-41
5-39
4-6
4-9
2-18
5-49
5-50
5-50
5-49
5-49
5-51
5-51
5-56

California Fuel ..................................................
5-6
Canada ........................................................... 7-4
Canadian Owners ................................................
ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ...........................
7-6
Capacities and Specifications ............................
5-86
Carbon Monoxide ...........................
4-26, 4-37, 4-33
Care of Safety Belts ........................................ 5-75
Care of Your
Cassette Tape Player ...................................
3-70
CDPlayer ..................................................
3-72
3-71
CDS ..........................................................
Cassette Deck Service ......................................
6-9
Cassette Tape Messages .................................
3-65
CD Adapter Kits ............................................. 3-66
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-37
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-50
Center Rear Passenger Position, Safety Belts ..... 1-27
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-60
Charging SystemLight ....................................
3-26
Check
Engine Light ...............................................
3-31
Checking Coolant ............................................
5-25
Checking Engine Oil ........................................
5-15
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
5-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ......................
1-60
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-78

Child Restraints
Child RestraintSystems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCHSystem ........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
SeatPosition ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
SeatPosition ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
SeatPosition ...........................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
WheretoPuttheRestraint
...........................
ChimeLevelAdjustment ..................................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Inside ofYour Vehicle ..................................
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................
Yl?derhndy M2l!?f5!?9!?ce ...............................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
CleaningExterior Lamps/Lenses .......................
ClimateControlSystem ...................................
Outlet Adjustment ........................................
Clutch, Hydraulic .............................................

1-38
1-34
1-44
1-32
1-46
1-48
1-46
1-50
1-42
1-43
1-41
3-72
3-17
5-72
5-75
E;-7g
5-75
5-76
3-18
3-21
5-23

Compact Disc Messages ................. 3.43.3.54.
3-68
Compact Spare Tire ........................................
5-71
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................
3-30
Heater. Engine ............................................
2-22
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-30
Cooling System ..............................................
5-29
Cruise Control ..................................................
3-9
Cupholder(s) ..................................................
2-37
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-10
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ..................................
7-6
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users .......................................................
7-3
Customer Assistance Offices ...........................
7-3
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .....................
7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ...... 7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................
7-9
Fep5flt-1~ saf&/
nnfnptc to the IJn]fed s f z f e ~
J --'VV.7-8
Government ..............................................
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program .........................
Service Publications Ordering Information ......... 7-9
Customizing the Automatic Door Locks ................ 2-9

DAB Radio ....................................................
3-70
DaytimeRunningLamps(DRL)
.........................
3-13
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting .................................
3-19
Delayed Headlamps ........................................
3-15
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-8
Dinghy Towing ................................................
4-33
Doing Your Own Service Work ...........................
5-3
Dolly Towing ..................................................
4-34
DomeLamp ...................................................
3-16
Door
Delayed Locking ...........................................
2-8
Locks ..........................................................
2-7
Power Door Locks .........................................
2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
...............2-8
Rear Security Locks ..................................... 2-10
Driver
1-14
Position, Safety Belt .....................................
1-3
Six-Way Power Seat ......................................
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-17
City ...........................................................
4-21
4-2
Defensive .....................................................
Drunken .......................................................
4-2
Freeway .....................................................
4-22
Hill and MountainRoads ..............................
4-25
...........................
4-19
In Rain andonWetRoads
Winter ........................................................
4-26
4

Driving OnGrades ..........................................
Driving on Snow or Ice ....................................
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ...............
Driving Through Flowing Water .........................
Driving with a Trailer .......................................

4-42
4-27
4-20
4-21
4-40

E
Easy Entry Seat ...............................................
Electrical System
Add-on Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Emergency Trunk Release Handle .....................
Emissions Inspection andMaintenance
Programs ...................................................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Change Engine Oil Light ...............................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant TemperatureGage ...........................
Cooling System Inspection ............................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................

1-6

5-81
5-81
5-81
5-81
2-14
3-33
5-21
5-42
3-35
3-31
5-23
2-22
3-30
6-14
5-12

Engine (cont.)
Exhaust .....................................................
Oil .............................................................
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
EngineCompartment Fuse Block ......................
Engine Coolant Level Check ..............................
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing ..................
Engine Oil Additives ........................................
Engine Oil Level Check .....................................
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance .....................
Enhanced Traction System
Active Light ................................................
WarningLight .............................................
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ........................
Entry/Exit Lighting ...........................................
Express-Down Window ....................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................

2-33
5-15
5-26
2-19
5-84
6-9
4-43
5-19
6-9
6-5
3-29
3-28
4-9
3-16
2-16
1-31
3-13

...
r d u l w u a l p c t .................................................
r-L-:-

/r\

Filter
EngineAirCleaner ......................................
Finding a PTY Station
(RDS, XMTMand DAB) .........................
3.48.
Finding a Station ............................
3.40,3.45.
Finish Care ....................................................
FinishDamage ...............................................

LI-IL

5-21
3-59
3-57
5-76
5-77

Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................
Flash-to-Pass ...................................................
Flat Tire ........................................................
Flat Tire, Changing .........................................
FIuid
Automatic Transaxle .....................................
Manual Transaxle ........................................
Power Steering ...........................................
Windshield Washer ......................................
FM Stereo .....................................................
Fog Lamps ....................................................
Folding the Seatback ........................................
Following Distance ..........................................
Footnotes ........................................................
Fuel ...............................................................
Additives ......................................................
California Fuel ..............................................
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................
Filling YourTank ...........................................
Fuels in Foreign Countries ..............................
Gage .........................................................
Gasoline Octane ...........................................
Gasoline Specifications ..................................
System Inspection .......................................
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Windshield Wiper .........................................

3-72
3-8
5-61
5-62
5-22
5-22
5-36
5-37
3-70
3-15
1-8
4-41
6-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-9
5-7
5-7
3-37
5-5
5-5
6-13
5-81
5-81

G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature .........................
Fuel ..........................................................
Speedometer ..............................................
Tachometer .................................................
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................
Specifications ...............................................
Glass Surfaces ...............................................
Glove Box .....................................................
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ....................................................

3-30
3-37
3-24
3-24
5-5
5-5
5-74
2-37

7-5

Hood (cont.)
Checking Things Under ................................
5-10
Release .....................................................
5-10
Horn ...............................................................
3-5
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank .................................................
5-31
How to Check ................................................
5-54
How to Check and Add Fluid ............................
5-23
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-37
ii
How to Use This Manual ......................................
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14
Hydraulic Clutch .............................................
5-23
Hydraulic Clutch SystemCheck ........................
6-10
Hydroplaning ..................................................
4-20

Hazard Warning Flashers .......................
........... 3-4
Head Restraints ...................................
........... 1-5
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ........ ........... 3-7
Headlamps .......................................... ......... 5-49
Bulb Replacement .............................
......... 5-49
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ... ......... 5-50
Halogen Bulbs .................................. ......... 5-49
Headlamps Off in Park(P) .....................
......... 3-15
Headlamps On Reminder .......................
........... 3-7
Highway Hypnosis .................................
......... 4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................
......... 4-25
Hitches ................................................
......... 4-39
Hood

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-28
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-27
If the Light Is Flashing .....................................
3-32
If the Light Is On Steady .................................
3-32
If YouAre Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice orSnow ....... 4-31
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer .....................
4-37
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ...........................
4-29
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-18
Ignition Transaxle LockCheck ..........................
6-12
Indicators .......................................................
3-22
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-34
5-54
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ..................................

Inspection
BrakeSystem .............................................
Engine Cooling System ................................
ExhaustSystem ..........................................
FuelSystem ...............................................
Part C . Periodic Maintenance .......................
Steering. Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal .........................................
Throttle System ...........................................
Instrument Panel
Cluster .......................................................
Overview .....................................................
Instrument Panel Brightness .............................
InstrumentPanelFuseBlock
(Passenger's Side) .......................................
InstrumentPanelFuseBlock
(Driver's Side) .............................................
Instrument Panel Fuse Blocks ...........................
Interior Lamps ................................................
Interior Plastic Components ..............................

Keys ...............................................................
6-14
6-14
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
3-23
3-2
3-16
5-83
5-82
5-81
3-16
5-74

J
Jump Starting .................................................

5-43

K
Key Lock Cylinders Service ..............................
6-10
KeyRemoval .................................................
2-32
KeylessEntrySystem ....................................... 2-3

2-2

Lamps
Exterior ...................................................... 3-13
Interior .......................................................
3-16
1-28
Lap Belt ........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...................................
1.14, 1-24
LATCHSystem
Child Restraints ...........................................
1-44
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
1-46
Latches, Seatback ............................................
1-5
Leather .........................................................
5-74
Leaving Your Vehicle .......................................
2-11
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running
(Automatic Transaxle Only) ...........................
2-31
Lift Seat, Power ...............................................
1-7
Light
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-25
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-28
*brake Sys'rem Vvarrliny .................................
5-10
Change Engine Oil ......................................
3-35
Charging System .........................................
3-26
Enhanced Traction System Active .................. 3-29
Enhanced Traction System Warning ............... 3-28
Low Coolant Warning ...................................
3-30
Low Oil Level .............................................
3-35
Low Washer Fluid Warning ...........................
3-36
7

Light (cont.)
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
3-31
Oil Pressure ...............................................
3-34
3-25
Safety Belt Reminder ...................................
Security ..................................................... 3-36
Service Vehicle Soon ...................................
3-36
Up-Shift .....................................................
3-26
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-35
Lockout Protection ..........................................
2-1 1
Locks
Delayed Locking ...........................................
2-8
Door ...........................................................
2-7
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-1 1
Lockout Protection .......................................
2-1 1
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks .............................
2-10
Loss of Control ...............................................
4-15
Low Coolant Warning Light ..............................
3-30
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .......................
3-36

Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts ......
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ...................................
At Least Once a Month ..........................
At Least Once a Year ............................
At Least Twice a Year ............................
Brake System Inspection ........................
8

..... 5-88

....... 6-9
....... 6-9
..... 6-10
..... 6-10
..... 6-14

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-14
6-13
Exhaust System Inspection ...........................
Fuel System Inspection ................................
6-13
How This Section is Organized .......................
6-3
6-2
Introduction ..................................................
6-2
Maintenance Requirements .............................
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............... 6-9
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-13
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ...............................................
6-15
Part E - Maintenance Record ........................
6-16
6-5
Scheduled Maintenance .................................
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ..........................
6-13
Throttle System Inspection ............................
6-14
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing .....................
4-43
Making Turns ................................................. 4-41
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-31
Manual Seats ...................................................
1-2
2-20
Manual Transaxle ............................................
5-22
Fluid ..........................................................
2-27
Operation ...................................................
6-10
Manual Transaxle Check ..................................
Manual Windows ............................................
2-15
Matching Transmitterts) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-5

Mexico. Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. VirginIslands) .................................
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................
OutsideConvexMirror .................................
Outside Power Mirrors ..................................
OutsideRemote Control Mirror ......................

7-4
2-35
2-36
2-36
2-35

NewVehicle Break-in ......................................
2-18
NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts ............ 5-88

0
Odometer ......................................................
Off-Road Recovery ..........................................
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ...............................
Engine .......................................................
Low Oil Level Light ......................................
nw--...-- I : - L C
rlcaautc L I Y I I L .............................................
OlderChildren,Restraints ................................
Operation ......................................................
Operation Tips ................................................
Other Warning Devices ......................................
Outlet Adjustment ............................................
Outside
ConvexMirror .............................................

3-24
4-13
3-35
5-15
3-35
13 Q A
WU-T

1-32
3-18
3-21
3-5
3-21

Outside (cont.)
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-36
Remote Control Mirror ..................................
2-35
Owners, Canadian ...............................................
ii
Owner’s Information ........................................
7-10

P
Park (P)
..... 2-32
Shifting Out of .....................................
Parking
2-29
Brake .............................. ..........................
2-33
Over Things That Burn ....... ..........................
2-32
Your Vehicle/Key Removal .. ..........................
Parking Brake and Automatic T‘ransaxle Park (P)
6-12
Mechanism Check ............. ..........................
Parking on Hills ..................... .........................
4-42
Park (P)
2-30
Shifting Into ....................... .........................
Part A . Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Part B . Owner Checks and Services .................. 6-9
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-13
D-4 n
E l ~ ~ i A r-tnA
n
I 1hv;cqnte
U I L
I
.... 6-15
Part E - Maintenance Record ...........................
6-16
Passing .................................................
4-14, 4-41
Passlock@ ..................................................... 2-17
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................
7-7
Playing a Cassette Tape ..................................
3-64
Piaying a Compact Disc .................. 3-41, 3-53, 3-00
Playing the Radio ...........................
3-39, 3-45, 3-56
~

Drrmnmmnnrlnrl

I ~ ’ c I W I 1 1 1 I I O I I U ~ IU IUIUI;)

UI I U

LUVII”UII&d

n nn

2-36

Power .............................................................
1-3
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8
Electrical System .........................................
5-81
Lift Seat .......................................................
1-7
Steering Fluid .............................................
5-36
Windows ....................................................
2-16
Power Steering ...............................................
4-1 1
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-8

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-13

Radio Messages .............................
3.41.3.50.
3-61
Radios .......................................................... 3-38
Care ofYour Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-70
3-72
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
3-71
Care ofYour CDs ........................................
DAB Radio Antenna System ..........................
3-72
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
3-55
Radio with CD ....................................
3.39. 3-43
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-39
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems(RDS) ................................
3-38
Theft-Deterrent ............................................
3-68
Understanding Reception ..............................
3-70
RDS and DAB Messages ......................... 3.49. 3-60
10

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ......................
1-29
Rear Seat Operation .........................................
1-8
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ............. 1-23
Rear Seat Passengers. Safety Belts .................. 1-23
Rear Window Defogger ....................................
3-20
Rearview Mirrors .............................................
2-35
Reclining Seatbacks ..........................................
1-3
Recreational VehicleTowing ............................. 4-32
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System.Operation ............ 2-4
2-13
Remote Trunk Release ....................................
Remote Trunk Release Lockout ........................
2-13
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ..................................................
5-64
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ...................5-63
Replacement Bulbs .........................................
5-51
5-42
Replacing Brake System Parts ..........................
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .....................................................
1-60
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ...................................
7-9
General Motors .............................................
7-9
United States Government ..............................
7-8
Restraint System Check ...................................
6-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-60
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
1-60
a Crash ..................................................
Restraint Systems
Checking ....................................................
1-60
Replacing Parts ...........................................
1-60

Restraints. Head ............................................... 1-5
2-19
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ......................
RightFrontPassenger Position. Safety Belts ...... 1-23
RoadsideAssistance Program ............................
7-5
Rocking YourVehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-31
Running Your Engine While YouAre Parked ....... 2-34

S
Safety Belt Reminder Light ...............................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
CenterRearPassenger Position ....................
Driver Position ............................................
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .....
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ......................................
.................................
RearSeatPassengers
RightFrontPassenger Position ......................
SafetyBeltExtender ....................................
SafetyBeltUse During Pregnancy .................
. . n - 1 ~ -A ..- r- .. R..-....--De113 Ml'G I U I L V C I yUl I C .........................
--<-A

3dlGLy

3-25
5-75
1-27
1-14
1-14
1-13
1-29
1-23
1-23
1-31
1-22
-in
1 - 3

Safety Chains ................................................. 4-40
SafetyWarningsand Symbols ..............................
iii
Scheduled Maintenance .....................................
6-5
Seatback Latches .............................................
1-5
Seats
Easy Entry Seat ............................................
1-6
Head Restraints ............................................
1-5

Seats (cont.)
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Power Lift Seat .............................................
1-7
1-8
Rear Seat Operation ......................................
Reclining Seatbacks ......................................
1-3
1-5
Seatback batches ..........................................
1-3
Six-Way Power Driver ....................................
Securing a Child Restraint
Center RearSeat Position ............................
1-48
Designed fortheLATCHSystem
................... 1-46
Rear Outside Seat Position ...........................
1-46
1-50
Right Front Seat Position ..............................
Security Light ................................................. 3-36
Security While You Travel ..................................
7-5
5-3
Service ...........................................................
Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour
Vehicle .....................................................
5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Engine Soon Light .......................................
3-31
Publications Ordering Information .....................
7-9
Vehicle Soon Light .......................................
3-36
Service Bulletins .............................................
7-10
Service Engine Soon Light ...............................
3-31
Service Manuals ...............................................
7-9
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only) ............... 3-49, 3-60
3-40, 3-46, 3-58
Setting Preset Stations ....................
Setting the Time
Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ......... 3-39
n
nadios
~WiitlOut Radio Data Syster-ns (RDs) .....
nr\
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble) .......... 3-40, 3-47, 3-58
n

J - J ~

Sheet Metal Damage .......................................
Shift Speeds ..................................................
Shifting Into Park (P) .......................................
Shifting Out of Park (P) ...................................
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ...........................
Skidding ........................................................
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips .......................
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems .....................
Specifications. Capacities .................................
Speedometer ..................................................
Starter Switch Check .......................................
Starting Your2.2L L4 ECOTECTMEngine ...........
Starting Your 3400 V6 Engine ...........................
Starting Your Engine .......................................
Steering ........................................................
Steering in Emergencies ..................................
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot
and Seal Inspection .....................................
Steering Tips ..................................................
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio .........................
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................
Cupholder(s) ...............................................
Glove Box ..................................................
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools ..........................
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools .......................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
Sun Visors .....................................................
Sunroof .........................................................
12

5-77
2-28
2-30
2-32
1-17
4-15
4-21
5-73
5-86
3-24
6-1 1
2-20
2-21
2-19
4-1 1
4-12
6-13
4-1 1
3-69
2-37
2-37
2-37
5-69
5-70
4-31
2-16
2-38

Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) .....
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ..........
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
What Makes anAirBag Inflate? ..........
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates? ........................................
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? .........
Where Are the Air Bags? ....................

...... 1-53
...... 1-57
...... 1-59
...... 1-57

...... 1-58
...... 1-56
...... 1-55

Tachometer ....................................................
Taillamps
Turn Signal. and Stoplamps ..........................
Theft.Deterrent. Radio .....................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ...................................
Passlock@ ..................................................
Throttle System Inspection ...............................
Tilt Wheel ........................................................
Tire Inflation Check ...........................................
Tires ..................................................... 5.53.
Buying New Tires ........................................
Chains .......................................................
Changing a Flat Tire ....................................
Compact Spare Tire .....................................
If a Tire Goes Flat .......................................
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ...............................
Inspection and Rotation ................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .........................

3-24
5-51
3-68
2-17
2-17
6-14
3-5
6-9
5-77
5-56
5-60
5-62
5-71
5-61
5-54
5-55
5-57

Tires (cont.)
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .................
Wheel Replacement .....................................
When It Is Timefor New Tires ......................
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater ....................
Top of theInstrument Panel .............................
Top Strap ......................................................
Top StrapAnchor Location ...............................
Torque Lock ...................................................
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires ..................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .....................................
Towing a Trailer ..........................................
YourVehicle ...............................................
Traction
Enhanced Traction System Active Light ...........
EnhancedTraction System (ETS) ....................
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light ........
Trailer Brakes .................................................
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ...........................................
Fluid,Manual ..............................................
Tr2.ns2x!E! Gperstls!?, ,*.ntc!X!tic .........................
TransaxleOperation, Manual ............................
Transmission
Up-Shift Light ..............................................
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
RepairManual ..............................................
TransportationOptions ......................................
..
Trap-Resistant Trunk Kit . . . . . .
I

5-59
5-59
5-56
2-23
5-74
1-42
1-43
2-31
4-39
4-32
4-37
4-32
3-29
4-9
3-28
4-40
5-22
5-22
9-24
2-27
L

3-26
7-9
7-7
2-14

Trip Odometer ................................................
3-24
Trunk ............................................................
2-12
Trunk Lamp ...................................................
3-17
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ..........................
3-6
TurnSignaVMultifunctionLever ...........................
3-6
Turn Signals WhenTowing a Trailer .................. 4-41

U
Underbody Flushing Service .............................
Understanding Radio Reception ........................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................
United States ...................................................
Up-Shift Light .................................................
Used Replacement Wheels ..............................
Using Cleaner on Fabric ..................................

6-12
3-70
5-57
7-4
3-26
5-60
5-73

v
Vehicle
Control ................................................. ....... 4-6
Damage Warnings .................................. ......... iv
Loaang ................................................. ..... 4-33
Parking Your .......................................... ..... 2-32
Service Soon Light ................................. ..... 3-36
Symbols ................................................
......... iv
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ........................................ ..... 5-80
Service Parts Identification Label .............. ..... 5-80
Vehicle Storage .........................................
5-43
.

Ventilation Adjustment ......................................
Vinyl .............................................................
Visor Vanity Mirror ..........................................
Visors ...........................................................

3-21
5-74
2-16
2-16

W
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators ................ 3-22
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-5
iii
Safety and Symbols .........................................
Vehicle Damage ..............................................
iv
Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ......................
3-36
5-75
Washing Your Vehicle ......................................
Weatherstrip Lubrication ...................................
6-10
Weight of the Trailer ........................................
4-38
Weight of the Trailer Tongue .............................
4-38
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................
5-18
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-20
5-24, 5-37
What to Use ..........................................
Wheels
5-59
Alignment and Tire Balance ..........................
Replacement ............................................... 5-59
When to Add Engine Oil ..................................
5-17
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life SystemTM)................................
5-19
When to Check ..............................................
5-54
When to Check and What to Use .....................
5-23
When to CheckPower Steering Fluid ................ 5-36
14

When You Are Ready to LeaveAfterParking
on a Hill .....................................................
4-43
Where to PuttheRestraint
............................... 1-41
Why Safety Belts Work ....................................
1-10
Window Lock Out ...........................................
2-16
Windows ....................................................... 2-15
Manual ...................................................... 2-15
Power ........................................................ 2-16
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...........................
5-76
3-9
Windshield Washer ...........................................
Fluid .......................................................... 5-37
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................. 6-9
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ......................................
5-52
Fuses ........................................................ 5-81
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-8
4-26
Winter Driving ................................................
6-10
Wiper Blade Check .........................................

XMTMSatellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-72
XMTMSatellite Radio Service ............................
3-70

Your Vehicle and the Environment .

.........

6-2

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Subject                         : Owner's Manual
Description                     : Owner's Manual
Modified                        : 2014:11:08 15:48:47.853-05:00
Creator                         : Creative Document Solutions, LLC.
Title (x-repair)                : 2003 Pontiac Grand AM
Size                            : 17092437
Author                          : Creative Document Solutions, LLC.
Extracted                       : 2014:11:03 09:47:23.103-05:00
Sha 1                           : 1a7cf3834c59bca7f7707fecb3e38cf03eb76352
Modify Date                     : 2002:08:22 12:26:32-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2002:08:22 12:26:32-04:00
Create Date                     : 2002:08:15 23:08:46-04:00
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat Capture 3.0
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 4.0
Style                           : Searchable Image (Exact)
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/2003/pontiac/grand_am
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 354
Title                           : Owner's Manual

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Pontiac 2003 Grand Am Owners Manual Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation